Upload
trannhi
View
217
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
Inicio raacutepido
Bloque modular para componentes conectados de control de motor simple
CC-QS006A-ES-P Bloque modular para componentes conectados de control de motor simple ndash Inicio raacutepido
Informacioacuten importante para el usuario
Los equipos de estado soacutelido tienen caracteriacutesticas de funcionamiento distintas de las de los equipos electromecaacutenicos El documento Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (publicacioacuten SGI-11 disponible en su oficina local de ventas de Rockwell Automation o en httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom) describe algunas diferencias importantes entre los equipos de estado soacutelido y los dispositivos electromecaacutenicos de loacutegica cableada Debido a estas diferencias y tambieacuten a la amplia variedad de usos de los equipos de estado soacutelido toda persona responsable de aplicarlos primero debe asegurarse de la idoneidad de cada una de las aplicaciones a las que estos equipos estaacuten destinados
En ninguacuten caso Rockwell Automation Inc seraacute responsable de dantildeos indirectos o emergentes que resulten del uso o de la aplicacioacuten de este equipo
Los ejemplos y los diagramas presentados en este manual se incluyen uacutenicamente con fines ilustrativos Debido a las numerosas variables y a los muchos requisitos relacionados con cualquier instalacioacuten en particular Rockwell Automation Inc no puede asumir ninguna responsabilidad u obligacioacuten por el uso que se haga basado en ejemplos y diagramas
Rockwell Automation Inc no asume ninguna obligacioacuten de patente respecto al uso de la informacioacuten los circuitos el equipo o el software descritos en este manual
Se prohiacutebe reproducir total o parcialmente el contenido de este manual sin la autorizacioacuten por escrito de Rockwell Automation Inc
Cuando es necesario este manual contiene notas que reclaman la atencioacuten del lector sobre determinados aspectos de seguridad
Allen-Bradley MicroLogix PanelView PanelView Component PowerFlex SMC SMC-3 TechConnect y Rockwell Automation son marcas comerciales de Rockwell Automation Inc
Las marcas comerciales que no pertenecen a Rockwell Automation son propiedad de sus respectivas compantildeiacuteas
ADVERTENCIAIdentifica informacioacuten sobre praacutecticas o circunstancias que pueden ocasionar una explosioacuten en un ambiente peligroso lo cual podriacutea producir lesiones personales o la muerte dantildeos materiales o peacuterdidas econoacutemicas
IMPORTANTE Identifica informacioacuten que es crucial para la comprensioacuten y aplicacioacuten correctas del producto
ATENCIOacuteN Identifica informacioacuten sobre praacutecticas y circunstancias que pueden provocar la muerte lesiones personales dantildeos materiales o peacuterdidas econoacutemicas Los mensajes de Atencioacuten ayudan a identificar los peligros prevenirlos y reconocer sus consecuencias
PELIGRO DE CHOQUE Es posible que haya etiquetas sobre el equipo o en el interior del mismo (por ejemplo en un variador o en un motor) para advertir sobre la posible presencia de voltajes peligrosos
PELIGRO DE QUEMADURA Es posible que haya etiquetas sobre el equipo o en el interior del mismo (por ejemplo en un variador o en un motor) para avisar de que las superficies que pueden alcanzar temperaturas peligrosas
Doacutende comenzar
Siga la ruta indicada a continuacioacuten parar arrancar controlar y monitorear motores de manera simple
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados
publicacioacuten CC-QS001
3Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 3
Doacutende comenzar
Notas
4 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Tabla de contenido
PrefacioIntroduccioacuten 7Convenciones utilizadas en este manual 8Recursos adicionales 9
Capiacutetulo 1Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Introduccioacuten 11Antes de comenzar 11Elementos necesarios 12Siga estos pasos 12Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M 13Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3 16Recursos adicionales 18
Capiacutetulo 2Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten 19Antes de comenzar 19Elementos necesarios 20Siga estos pasos 20Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal 21Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con
el controlador MicroLogix 22Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview 24
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting 25Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting 25Coacutemo interpretar los fallos 28Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 29Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores 30
Recursos adicionales 30Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation 32Contraportada 32
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 5
Tabla de contenido
Notas
6 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Prefacio
Introduccioacuten Esta guiacutea de inicio raacutepido estaacute disentildeada para proporcionar una manera de implementar un componente conectado para control de motor simple Utilizando informacioacuten discreta (sentildeales on-off simples procedentes de contactos) de un variador PowerFlex 4M un arrancador SMC-3 un arrancador 103T o un arrancador 190E este bloque modular muestra un ejemplo de coacutemo se extrae informacioacuten baacutesica importante sobre el estado de un motor y coacutemo esta informacioacuten se visualiza en un terminal PanelView Component (PVc) Se puede utilizar cualquiera de estos arrancadores o variadores (o todos ellos) El variador PowerFlex 4M se utiliza para este bloque modular pero el procedimiento es muy similar para los variadores PowerFlex 4 40 40P y 400
Como ayuda para el disentildeo y la instalacioacuten de su sistema en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001 se incluyen los archivos de aplicacioacuten y maacutes informacioacuten Este CD contiene listas de materiales (BOM) esquemas CAD para configuracioacuten y cableado del panel programas de control pantallas de interface operador-maacutequina (HMI) y otros recursos Con estas herramientas y las mejores praacutecticas de disentildeo incorporadas el disentildeador del sistema queda libre para concentrarse en disentildear el control de la maacutequina sin tener que preocuparse por tareas secundarias al disentildeo
El comienzo de cada capiacutetulo contiene la siguiente informacioacuten Lea estas secciones detalladamente antes de comenzar a trabajar en cada capiacutetulo
bull Antes de comenzar ndash Esta seccioacuten indica los pasos que deben realizarse y las decisiones que deben tomarse antes de comenzar el capiacutetulo Los capiacutetulos contenidos en esta guiacutea de inicio raacutepido no tienen que completarse en el orden en que aparecen No obstante esta seccioacuten define la preparacioacuten miacutenima requerida antes de completar el capiacutetulo correspondiente
bull Elementos necesarios ndash En esta seccioacuten se enumeran las herramientas requeridas para completar los pasos del capiacutetulo Entre ellas figuran sin ser las uacutenicas herramientas de hardware y software
bull Siga estos pasos ndash Esta seccioacuten ilustra los pasos del capiacutetulo e indica queacute pasos se deben seguir para completar los ejemplos
IMPORTANTE Use este documento Bloque modular de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido junto con el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001
En Recursos adicionales en la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de documentos de Inicio raacutepido
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 7
Convenciones utilizadas en este manual
En este manual se emplean las siguientes convenciones
Convencioacuten Significado Ejemplo
Hacer clic Hacer clic una vez con el botoacuten izquierdo del mouse Haga clic en ldquoEditrdquo
Teclear Escribir con el teclado Teclee la direccioacuten IP
Hacer clic con el botoacuten derecho del mouse
Hacer clic una vez con el botoacuten derecho del mouse mientras el cursor estaacute colocado sobre un objeto o seleccioacuten
Haga clic con el botoacuten derecho del mouse en el icono 1768 Bus
Seleccionar Utilizar el mouse para resaltar una opcioacuten especiacutefica Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten
Presionar Presionar una tecla especiacutefica en el teclado o en el bloque de teclas del PowerFlex 4M Presione Enter
Tocar Tocar un botoacuten especiacutefico en el terminal PanelView Component (PVc) Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
8 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Recursos adicionales
Recurso Descripcioacuten
Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo seleccionar productos y coacutemo obtener acceso a informacioacuten sobre el panel y el cableado
CD Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
Proporciona archivos para los bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados
Boletiacuten sobre los moacutedulos de conexioacuten de los arrancadores suaves 150 SMC-3 (1-37A)SMC-Delta (1-32A) 41053-173-01 (1)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre los moacutedulos de conexioacuten al SMC-3
Boletiacuten sobre el arrancador suave 150 SMC-3 (3-37A) 41053-167-01 (5)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre la instalacioacuten y el ajuste del SMC-3
Boletiacuten sobre el releacute de sobrecarga 193 E1 Plus 41053-358-01 (3)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre la instalacioacuten y el ajuste de la sobrecarga
Disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motorprotectores de circuitos de motor 21-301-951-01
Proporciona instrucciones para instalar el MPCB y el MCP
Bloque modular para componentes conectados de control de posicioacuten ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS003
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar y configurar los paraacutemetros del variador PowerFlex 40P con el programa preconfigurado RSLogix 500 que controla su sistema base incluye sugerencias de aplicacioacuten asiacute como informacioacuten para implementar las funciones de copia de seguridad y restauracioacuten de paraacutemetros del variador
MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publicacioacuten 1763-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo usar el controlador programable MicroLogix 1100
MicroLogix 1400 User Manual publicacioacuten 1766-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar el controlador programable MicroLogix 1400
PanelView Component Quick Start Manual publicacioacuten 2711C-QS001A
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar el PanelView Component
Terminales HMI PanelView Component Manual del usuario publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar los terminales HMI del PanelView Component
PowerFlex 4M Manual del usuario publicacioacuten 22F-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 4M y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 4 User Manual publicacioacuten 22A-UM001 Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 4 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 40 User Manual publicacioacuten 22B-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 40P User Manual publicacioacuten 22D-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 400 User Manual publicacioacuten 22C-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
httpwwwabcomdrivesdriveexplorer Proporciona acceso al software DriveExplorerLite
httpwwwabcom Proporciona acceso al sitio web de Allen-Bradley
httprockwellautomationcomknowledgebase Proporciona acceso al autoservicio de asistencia teacutecnica
httpwwwrockwellautomationcomcomponentsconnected
Proporciona acceso al sitio web de componentes conectados
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 9
Notas
10 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 1
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo contiene instrucciones para configurar el variador PowerFlex 4M y el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
En el variador PowerFlex 4M usted configuraraacute dos paraacutemetros Eacutestos son los paraacutemetros baacutesicos que se deben modificar con respecto a los ajustes predeterminados en faacutebrica para que los controladores MicroLogix reciban correctamente la retroalimentacioacuten necesaria En su aplicacioacuten de maacutequina tal vez haya otros paraacutemetros de variador que deban ser ajustados Consulte la documentacioacuten de su variador para obtener informacioacuten sobre otros paraacutemetros del mismo
Asimismo usted ajustaraacute los microinterruptores del controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 que se requieren para enviar la retroalimentacioacuten discreta apropiada al controlador MicroLogix
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y compruebe que haya seguido las recomendaciones sobre disentildeo e instalacioacuten de hardware asiacute como las de instalacioacuten de software
bull Conecte su variador a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
11Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 11
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Elementos necesarios
bull CD Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Uno o maacutes de estos variadores o arrancadoresndash Variador PowerFlex clase 4 (en este documento se utiliza el variador PowerFlex 4M)
bull Los variadores PowerFlex 4M 4 40 y 400 tienen un teclado y una pantalla incorporados para modificar los paraacutemetros
bull En el caso del variador PowerFlex 40P para modificar los paraacutemetros necesita
- Una interface de mano nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 22-HIM-A3o bien
- El software DriveExplorer instalado en la computadora personal y una interface USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1203-USB
ndash Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBRndash Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso variacutea de acuerdo al motor
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para configurar los paraacutemetros en los variadores y ajustar los microinterruptores en el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
Inicio
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M paacutegina 13
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
12 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M
Los valores predeterminados en faacutebrica para los distintos paraacutemetros permiten controlar el variador desde el teclado integrado No es necesario realizar ninguna programacioacuten para iniciar parar cambiar la direccioacuten o controlar la velocidad directamente desde el teclado integrado
No obstante para este bloque modular usted estableceraacute el paraacutemetro P106 [Start Source] para control de 2 conductores En el ejemplo correspondiente a este bloque modular el variador PF 4M se utiliza en modo de control SRC de 2 conductores (surtidor interno) sin inversioacuten SRC es el ajuste predeterminado para los variadores nuevos Si su variador ya ha sido utilizado anteriormente aseguacuterese de que el interruptor SNKSRC (SinkSource) situado bajo la cubierta frontal del variador PF 4M esteacute ajustado en SRC Para otros requerimientos especiacuteficos no contemplados en este ejemplo consulte el manual de usuario del variador PF 4M
Ademaacutes usted modificaraacute el paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Sel] para visualizar lsquoMotorRunningrsquo ya que este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten vea Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores paacutegina 30
Siga este procedimiento para cambiar los paraacutemetros P106 [Start Source] y t221 [Relay Out Sel] por medio del teclado PowerFlex 4M que se describe a continuacioacuten
Teclado del PowerFlex 4M
Tecla Nombre de la tecla
Descripcioacuten
Escapebull Retroceder un paso en el modo de programacioacuten
bull Cancelar el cambio de un valor de paraacutemetro y salir del modo de programacioacuten
Selectbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Seleccionar un diacutegito al visualizar un valor de paraacutemetro
Flecha hacia arriba
bull Desplazarse por los grupos y paraacutemetros
bull Aumentar y disminuir el valor de un diacutegito parpadeanteFlecha hacia abajo
Enterbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Guardar un cambio en el valor de un paraacutemetro
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 13
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
1 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
2 Presione Sel hasta que parpadee el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo
3 Presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
4 Presione Enter
La lsquoP deja de parpadear mientras la tecla numeacuterica del extremo derecho parpadea
Por defecto se visualiza el primer paraacutemetro lsquoPrsquo P101 Si presiona la flecha hacia arriba aumenta el valor de los paraacutemetros lsquoPrsquo si presiona la flecha hacia abajo disminuye dicho valor
5 Presione la flecha hacia arriba cinco veces para visualizar P106
Se visualiza el valor actual del paraacutemetro P106 que en este caso es lsquo0rsquo
6 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo0rsquo parpadea
7 Presione dos veces la flecha hacia arriba para ajustar el valor a lsquo2rsquo
8 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado
El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
9 Presione Esc
P106 se debe visualizar con el valor 6 parpadeando
10 Presione Esc hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
11 Presione la flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo para desplazarse por el menuacute de grupo hasta llegar a la lsquotrsquo
12 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo1rsquo parpadea
Detenga el variador antes de cambiar el paraacutemetro P106
14 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
13 Presione y mantenga presionada la flecha hacia arriba hasta que llegue al valor lsquo221rsquo
Si se pasa presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta regresar al valor lsquo221rsquo
14 Presione dos veces Enter para hacer que el valor lsquo0rsquo parpadee
15 Presione la flecha hacia arriba para desplazarse hasta el valor lsquo2rsquo
16 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
17 Presione Esc
Ahora el paraacutemetro t221 se debe visualizar con el lsquo1rsquo parpadeando
18 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
19 Desconecte la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador hasta que la pantalla quede en blanco y luego vuelva a conectar la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
Ahora su variador estaacute configurado para ser controlado mediante botones y comandos de comunicacioacuten iniciados desde el controlador MicroLogix
Al igual que sucede con todos los bloques modulares eacutestos son ejemplos de coacutemo recuperar informacioacuten de un producto de forma discreta Es posible cambiar el paraacutemetro t221 u otros ajustes de los arrancadores y variadores conforme a los requisitos de su aplicacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 15
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
El controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 se debe establecer para el contactor de aislamiento y para los valores establecidos para el motor A continuacioacuten aparecen los ajustes de microinterruptor utilizados por el controlador SMC-3 y los pasos necesarios para modificarlos
SUGERENCIA El 140M MPCB especificado en la lista de materiales para este bloque modular tiene un disparo de clase 10 No obstante si en el controlador SMC-3 desea utilizar los ajustes de clase de disparo por sobrecarga puede cambiar el 140M MPCB por el 140M MCP
16 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
1 Utilizando el siguiente cuadro estableza los ajustes de microinterruptor de forma que satisfagan las necesidades de arranque de su motor
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 17
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
2 Aseguacuterese de que el microinterruptor 14 tenga el ajuste Normal (apagado)
De ese modo se introduce el contactor de aislamiento cuando el SMC-3 ha recibido la sentildeal de entrada El microinterruptor 14 tambieacuten cierra el contacto auxiliar NA montado lateralmente cuando el arrancador llega a la velocidad deseada El cierre de este contacto auxiliar enviacutea la sentildeal de vuelta al controlador MicroLogix
3 Si cambia a un MCP ajuste los microinterruptores 11 y 12 a la clase apropiada de disparo por sobrecarga
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
IMPORTANTE El arrancador 103T utiliza un 140M MCP (protector de circuitos de motor) que a su vez emplea una sobrecarga separada (E1 Plus) Usted debe ajustar esta sobrecarga conforme a las necesidades de su sistema
El arrancador 190E el arrancador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M deben tener el cuadrante de sobrecarga ajustado a 140M MPCB (disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motor)
18 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 2
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo explica coacutemo confirmar que la comunicacioacuten se estaacute desarrollando del modo deseado entre el controlador MicroLogix y los arrancadores discretos individuales asiacute como entre el controlador MicroLogix y el terminal PanelView Component Para arrancar y parar por medio del terminal PVc el interruptor HOA externo debe estar en la en posicioacuten Auto En la posicioacuten Hand o sea modo manual el terminal PVc puede leer el estado de los arrancadores y de los variadores pero no puede arrancar o parar
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y aseguacuterese de haber completado todos los pasos que aparecen en el capiacutetulo 3 de dicho documento
bull Verifique que hayan completado todos los pasos descritos en el Capiacutetulo 1 de este documento
bull Verifique que todos los dispositivos hayan sido conectados seguacuten el diagrama de cableado CAD Simple Motor Control contenido en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Compruebe que el controlador MicroLogix el variador PowerFlex y el terminal PVc esteacuten conectados a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
19Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 19
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Elementos necesarios
bull CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Computadora personal con el explorador web Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox
bull Terminal PanelView Component
bull Uno o maacutes de los siguientes variadores o arrancadores
bull Variador PowerFlex 4M
bull Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBR
bull Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE
bull Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso puede variar de acuerdo al motor
bull Controlador MicroLogix 1100 oacute 1400
bull Cable en serie nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1761-CBL-PM02
bull Cable USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 2711C-CBL-UU02 o comparable
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para verificar que existe comunicacioacuten entre sus dispositivos y para probar el sistema
Inicio
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
paacutegina 21
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador
MicroLogix paacutegina 22
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
paacutegina 25
20 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
Usted puede obtener acceso al entorno de disentildeo PanelView Explorer a traveacutes de un explorador web Para ello debe conectar su computadora al terminal PVc mediante una conexioacuten USB Antes de conectar su computadora al puerto USB del terminal PVc primero debe instalar el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device en una computadora cuyo sistema operativo sea Windows XP o Windows Vista Despueacutes de instalar el driver puede conectar el terminal PVc a su computadora Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el driver consulte el manual de usuario Terminales HMI PanelView Component publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Conexiones USB del terminal PVc
Todos los terminales PanelView Component permiten la conexioacuten mediante puerto USB y necesitan una computadora que tenga el sistema operativo Windows XP o Windows Vista ademaacutes de tener instalado el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device El driver no se puede instalar en una computadora con el sistema operativo Windows 2000
1 Conecte un extremo de un cable USB al puerto de dispositivos mini-USB de su terminal PVc
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable USB a un puerto USB de su computadora personal
3 Encienda el terminal PVc y la computadora personal
Ventana de inicio de PanelView Explorer
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 21
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA ltFEFF00550073006100720065002000710075006500730074006500200069006d0070006f007300740061007a0069006f006e00690020007000650072002000630072006500610072006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400690020005000440046002000610064006100740074006900200070006500720020006c00610020007300740061006d00700061002000650020006c0061002000760069007300750061006c0069007a007a0061007a0069006f006e006500200064006900200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006900200061007a00690065006e00640061006c0069002e0020004900200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740069002000500044004600200070006f00730073006f006e006f0020006500730073006500720065002000610070006500720074006900200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065002000760065007200730069006f006e006900200073007500630063006500730073006900760065002egt NOR 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 SVE ltFEFF0041006e007600e4006e00640020006400650020006800e4007200200069006e0073007400e4006c006c006e0069006e006700610072006e00610020006e00e40072002000640075002000760069006c006c00200073006b0061007000610020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400200073006f006d00200070006100730073006100720020006600f600720020007000e5006c00690074006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f006300680020007500740073006b0072006900660074002000610076002000610066006600e4007200730064006f006b0075006d0065006e0074002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0061006e002000f600700070006e006100730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f00630068002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006c006c00650072002000730065006e006100720065002egt ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Informacioacuten importante para el usuario
Los equipos de estado soacutelido tienen caracteriacutesticas de funcionamiento distintas de las de los equipos electromecaacutenicos El documento Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (publicacioacuten SGI-11 disponible en su oficina local de ventas de Rockwell Automation o en httpliteraturerockwellautomationcom) describe algunas diferencias importantes entre los equipos de estado soacutelido y los dispositivos electromecaacutenicos de loacutegica cableada Debido a estas diferencias y tambieacuten a la amplia variedad de usos de los equipos de estado soacutelido toda persona responsable de aplicarlos primero debe asegurarse de la idoneidad de cada una de las aplicaciones a las que estos equipos estaacuten destinados
En ninguacuten caso Rockwell Automation Inc seraacute responsable de dantildeos indirectos o emergentes que resulten del uso o de la aplicacioacuten de este equipo
Los ejemplos y los diagramas presentados en este manual se incluyen uacutenicamente con fines ilustrativos Debido a las numerosas variables y a los muchos requisitos relacionados con cualquier instalacioacuten en particular Rockwell Automation Inc no puede asumir ninguna responsabilidad u obligacioacuten por el uso que se haga basado en ejemplos y diagramas
Rockwell Automation Inc no asume ninguna obligacioacuten de patente respecto al uso de la informacioacuten los circuitos el equipo o el software descritos en este manual
Se prohiacutebe reproducir total o parcialmente el contenido de este manual sin la autorizacioacuten por escrito de Rockwell Automation Inc
Cuando es necesario este manual contiene notas que reclaman la atencioacuten del lector sobre determinados aspectos de seguridad
Allen-Bradley MicroLogix PanelView PanelView Component PowerFlex SMC SMC-3 TechConnect y Rockwell Automation son marcas comerciales de Rockwell Automation Inc
Las marcas comerciales que no pertenecen a Rockwell Automation son propiedad de sus respectivas compantildeiacuteas
ADVERTENCIAIdentifica informacioacuten sobre praacutecticas o circunstancias que pueden ocasionar una explosioacuten en un ambiente peligroso lo cual podriacutea producir lesiones personales o la muerte dantildeos materiales o peacuterdidas econoacutemicas
IMPORTANTE Identifica informacioacuten que es crucial para la comprensioacuten y aplicacioacuten correctas del producto
ATENCIOacuteN Identifica informacioacuten sobre praacutecticas y circunstancias que pueden provocar la muerte lesiones personales dantildeos materiales o peacuterdidas econoacutemicas Los mensajes de Atencioacuten ayudan a identificar los peligros prevenirlos y reconocer sus consecuencias
PELIGRO DE CHOQUE Es posible que haya etiquetas sobre el equipo o en el interior del mismo (por ejemplo en un variador o en un motor) para advertir sobre la posible presencia de voltajes peligrosos
PELIGRO DE QUEMADURA Es posible que haya etiquetas sobre el equipo o en el interior del mismo (por ejemplo en un variador o en un motor) para avisar de que las superficies que pueden alcanzar temperaturas peligrosas
Doacutende comenzar
Siga la ruta indicada a continuacioacuten parar arrancar controlar y monitorear motores de manera simple
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados
publicacioacuten CC-QS001
3Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 3
Doacutende comenzar
Notas
4 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Tabla de contenido
PrefacioIntroduccioacuten 7Convenciones utilizadas en este manual 8Recursos adicionales 9
Capiacutetulo 1Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Introduccioacuten 11Antes de comenzar 11Elementos necesarios 12Siga estos pasos 12Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M 13Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3 16Recursos adicionales 18
Capiacutetulo 2Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten 19Antes de comenzar 19Elementos necesarios 20Siga estos pasos 20Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal 21Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con
el controlador MicroLogix 22Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview 24
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting 25Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting 25Coacutemo interpretar los fallos 28Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 29Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores 30
Recursos adicionales 30Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation 32Contraportada 32
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 5
Tabla de contenido
Notas
6 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Prefacio
Introduccioacuten Esta guiacutea de inicio raacutepido estaacute disentildeada para proporcionar una manera de implementar un componente conectado para control de motor simple Utilizando informacioacuten discreta (sentildeales on-off simples procedentes de contactos) de un variador PowerFlex 4M un arrancador SMC-3 un arrancador 103T o un arrancador 190E este bloque modular muestra un ejemplo de coacutemo se extrae informacioacuten baacutesica importante sobre el estado de un motor y coacutemo esta informacioacuten se visualiza en un terminal PanelView Component (PVc) Se puede utilizar cualquiera de estos arrancadores o variadores (o todos ellos) El variador PowerFlex 4M se utiliza para este bloque modular pero el procedimiento es muy similar para los variadores PowerFlex 4 40 40P y 400
Como ayuda para el disentildeo y la instalacioacuten de su sistema en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001 se incluyen los archivos de aplicacioacuten y maacutes informacioacuten Este CD contiene listas de materiales (BOM) esquemas CAD para configuracioacuten y cableado del panel programas de control pantallas de interface operador-maacutequina (HMI) y otros recursos Con estas herramientas y las mejores praacutecticas de disentildeo incorporadas el disentildeador del sistema queda libre para concentrarse en disentildear el control de la maacutequina sin tener que preocuparse por tareas secundarias al disentildeo
El comienzo de cada capiacutetulo contiene la siguiente informacioacuten Lea estas secciones detalladamente antes de comenzar a trabajar en cada capiacutetulo
bull Antes de comenzar ndash Esta seccioacuten indica los pasos que deben realizarse y las decisiones que deben tomarse antes de comenzar el capiacutetulo Los capiacutetulos contenidos en esta guiacutea de inicio raacutepido no tienen que completarse en el orden en que aparecen No obstante esta seccioacuten define la preparacioacuten miacutenima requerida antes de completar el capiacutetulo correspondiente
bull Elementos necesarios ndash En esta seccioacuten se enumeran las herramientas requeridas para completar los pasos del capiacutetulo Entre ellas figuran sin ser las uacutenicas herramientas de hardware y software
bull Siga estos pasos ndash Esta seccioacuten ilustra los pasos del capiacutetulo e indica queacute pasos se deben seguir para completar los ejemplos
IMPORTANTE Use este documento Bloque modular de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido junto con el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001
En Recursos adicionales en la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de documentos de Inicio raacutepido
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 7
Convenciones utilizadas en este manual
En este manual se emplean las siguientes convenciones
Convencioacuten Significado Ejemplo
Hacer clic Hacer clic una vez con el botoacuten izquierdo del mouse Haga clic en ldquoEditrdquo
Teclear Escribir con el teclado Teclee la direccioacuten IP
Hacer clic con el botoacuten derecho del mouse
Hacer clic una vez con el botoacuten derecho del mouse mientras el cursor estaacute colocado sobre un objeto o seleccioacuten
Haga clic con el botoacuten derecho del mouse en el icono 1768 Bus
Seleccionar Utilizar el mouse para resaltar una opcioacuten especiacutefica Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten
Presionar Presionar una tecla especiacutefica en el teclado o en el bloque de teclas del PowerFlex 4M Presione Enter
Tocar Tocar un botoacuten especiacutefico en el terminal PanelView Component (PVc) Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
8 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Recursos adicionales
Recurso Descripcioacuten
Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo seleccionar productos y coacutemo obtener acceso a informacioacuten sobre el panel y el cableado
CD Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
Proporciona archivos para los bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados
Boletiacuten sobre los moacutedulos de conexioacuten de los arrancadores suaves 150 SMC-3 (1-37A)SMC-Delta (1-32A) 41053-173-01 (1)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre los moacutedulos de conexioacuten al SMC-3
Boletiacuten sobre el arrancador suave 150 SMC-3 (3-37A) 41053-167-01 (5)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre la instalacioacuten y el ajuste del SMC-3
Boletiacuten sobre el releacute de sobrecarga 193 E1 Plus 41053-358-01 (3)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre la instalacioacuten y el ajuste de la sobrecarga
Disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motorprotectores de circuitos de motor 21-301-951-01
Proporciona instrucciones para instalar el MPCB y el MCP
Bloque modular para componentes conectados de control de posicioacuten ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS003
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar y configurar los paraacutemetros del variador PowerFlex 40P con el programa preconfigurado RSLogix 500 que controla su sistema base incluye sugerencias de aplicacioacuten asiacute como informacioacuten para implementar las funciones de copia de seguridad y restauracioacuten de paraacutemetros del variador
MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publicacioacuten 1763-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo usar el controlador programable MicroLogix 1100
MicroLogix 1400 User Manual publicacioacuten 1766-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar el controlador programable MicroLogix 1400
PanelView Component Quick Start Manual publicacioacuten 2711C-QS001A
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar el PanelView Component
Terminales HMI PanelView Component Manual del usuario publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar los terminales HMI del PanelView Component
PowerFlex 4M Manual del usuario publicacioacuten 22F-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 4M y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 4 User Manual publicacioacuten 22A-UM001 Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 4 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 40 User Manual publicacioacuten 22B-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 40P User Manual publicacioacuten 22D-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 400 User Manual publicacioacuten 22C-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
httpwwwabcomdrivesdriveexplorer Proporciona acceso al software DriveExplorerLite
httpwwwabcom Proporciona acceso al sitio web de Allen-Bradley
httprockwellautomationcomknowledgebase Proporciona acceso al autoservicio de asistencia teacutecnica
httpwwwrockwellautomationcomcomponentsconnected
Proporciona acceso al sitio web de componentes conectados
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 9
Notas
10 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 1
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo contiene instrucciones para configurar el variador PowerFlex 4M y el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
En el variador PowerFlex 4M usted configuraraacute dos paraacutemetros Eacutestos son los paraacutemetros baacutesicos que se deben modificar con respecto a los ajustes predeterminados en faacutebrica para que los controladores MicroLogix reciban correctamente la retroalimentacioacuten necesaria En su aplicacioacuten de maacutequina tal vez haya otros paraacutemetros de variador que deban ser ajustados Consulte la documentacioacuten de su variador para obtener informacioacuten sobre otros paraacutemetros del mismo
Asimismo usted ajustaraacute los microinterruptores del controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 que se requieren para enviar la retroalimentacioacuten discreta apropiada al controlador MicroLogix
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y compruebe que haya seguido las recomendaciones sobre disentildeo e instalacioacuten de hardware asiacute como las de instalacioacuten de software
bull Conecte su variador a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
11Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 11
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Elementos necesarios
bull CD Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Uno o maacutes de estos variadores o arrancadoresndash Variador PowerFlex clase 4 (en este documento se utiliza el variador PowerFlex 4M)
bull Los variadores PowerFlex 4M 4 40 y 400 tienen un teclado y una pantalla incorporados para modificar los paraacutemetros
bull En el caso del variador PowerFlex 40P para modificar los paraacutemetros necesita
- Una interface de mano nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 22-HIM-A3o bien
- El software DriveExplorer instalado en la computadora personal y una interface USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1203-USB
ndash Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBRndash Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso variacutea de acuerdo al motor
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para configurar los paraacutemetros en los variadores y ajustar los microinterruptores en el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
Inicio
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M paacutegina 13
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
12 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M
Los valores predeterminados en faacutebrica para los distintos paraacutemetros permiten controlar el variador desde el teclado integrado No es necesario realizar ninguna programacioacuten para iniciar parar cambiar la direccioacuten o controlar la velocidad directamente desde el teclado integrado
No obstante para este bloque modular usted estableceraacute el paraacutemetro P106 [Start Source] para control de 2 conductores En el ejemplo correspondiente a este bloque modular el variador PF 4M se utiliza en modo de control SRC de 2 conductores (surtidor interno) sin inversioacuten SRC es el ajuste predeterminado para los variadores nuevos Si su variador ya ha sido utilizado anteriormente aseguacuterese de que el interruptor SNKSRC (SinkSource) situado bajo la cubierta frontal del variador PF 4M esteacute ajustado en SRC Para otros requerimientos especiacuteficos no contemplados en este ejemplo consulte el manual de usuario del variador PF 4M
Ademaacutes usted modificaraacute el paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Sel] para visualizar lsquoMotorRunningrsquo ya que este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten vea Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores paacutegina 30
Siga este procedimiento para cambiar los paraacutemetros P106 [Start Source] y t221 [Relay Out Sel] por medio del teclado PowerFlex 4M que se describe a continuacioacuten
Teclado del PowerFlex 4M
Tecla Nombre de la tecla
Descripcioacuten
Escapebull Retroceder un paso en el modo de programacioacuten
bull Cancelar el cambio de un valor de paraacutemetro y salir del modo de programacioacuten
Selectbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Seleccionar un diacutegito al visualizar un valor de paraacutemetro
Flecha hacia arriba
bull Desplazarse por los grupos y paraacutemetros
bull Aumentar y disminuir el valor de un diacutegito parpadeanteFlecha hacia abajo
Enterbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Guardar un cambio en el valor de un paraacutemetro
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 13
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
1 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
2 Presione Sel hasta que parpadee el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo
3 Presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
4 Presione Enter
La lsquoP deja de parpadear mientras la tecla numeacuterica del extremo derecho parpadea
Por defecto se visualiza el primer paraacutemetro lsquoPrsquo P101 Si presiona la flecha hacia arriba aumenta el valor de los paraacutemetros lsquoPrsquo si presiona la flecha hacia abajo disminuye dicho valor
5 Presione la flecha hacia arriba cinco veces para visualizar P106
Se visualiza el valor actual del paraacutemetro P106 que en este caso es lsquo0rsquo
6 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo0rsquo parpadea
7 Presione dos veces la flecha hacia arriba para ajustar el valor a lsquo2rsquo
8 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado
El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
9 Presione Esc
P106 se debe visualizar con el valor 6 parpadeando
10 Presione Esc hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
11 Presione la flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo para desplazarse por el menuacute de grupo hasta llegar a la lsquotrsquo
12 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo1rsquo parpadea
Detenga el variador antes de cambiar el paraacutemetro P106
14 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
13 Presione y mantenga presionada la flecha hacia arriba hasta que llegue al valor lsquo221rsquo
Si se pasa presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta regresar al valor lsquo221rsquo
14 Presione dos veces Enter para hacer que el valor lsquo0rsquo parpadee
15 Presione la flecha hacia arriba para desplazarse hasta el valor lsquo2rsquo
16 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
17 Presione Esc
Ahora el paraacutemetro t221 se debe visualizar con el lsquo1rsquo parpadeando
18 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
19 Desconecte la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador hasta que la pantalla quede en blanco y luego vuelva a conectar la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
Ahora su variador estaacute configurado para ser controlado mediante botones y comandos de comunicacioacuten iniciados desde el controlador MicroLogix
Al igual que sucede con todos los bloques modulares eacutestos son ejemplos de coacutemo recuperar informacioacuten de un producto de forma discreta Es posible cambiar el paraacutemetro t221 u otros ajustes de los arrancadores y variadores conforme a los requisitos de su aplicacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 15
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
El controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 se debe establecer para el contactor de aislamiento y para los valores establecidos para el motor A continuacioacuten aparecen los ajustes de microinterruptor utilizados por el controlador SMC-3 y los pasos necesarios para modificarlos
SUGERENCIA El 140M MPCB especificado en la lista de materiales para este bloque modular tiene un disparo de clase 10 No obstante si en el controlador SMC-3 desea utilizar los ajustes de clase de disparo por sobrecarga puede cambiar el 140M MPCB por el 140M MCP
16 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
1 Utilizando el siguiente cuadro estableza los ajustes de microinterruptor de forma que satisfagan las necesidades de arranque de su motor
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 17
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
2 Aseguacuterese de que el microinterruptor 14 tenga el ajuste Normal (apagado)
De ese modo se introduce el contactor de aislamiento cuando el SMC-3 ha recibido la sentildeal de entrada El microinterruptor 14 tambieacuten cierra el contacto auxiliar NA montado lateralmente cuando el arrancador llega a la velocidad deseada El cierre de este contacto auxiliar enviacutea la sentildeal de vuelta al controlador MicroLogix
3 Si cambia a un MCP ajuste los microinterruptores 11 y 12 a la clase apropiada de disparo por sobrecarga
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
IMPORTANTE El arrancador 103T utiliza un 140M MCP (protector de circuitos de motor) que a su vez emplea una sobrecarga separada (E1 Plus) Usted debe ajustar esta sobrecarga conforme a las necesidades de su sistema
El arrancador 190E el arrancador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M deben tener el cuadrante de sobrecarga ajustado a 140M MPCB (disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motor)
18 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 2
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo explica coacutemo confirmar que la comunicacioacuten se estaacute desarrollando del modo deseado entre el controlador MicroLogix y los arrancadores discretos individuales asiacute como entre el controlador MicroLogix y el terminal PanelView Component Para arrancar y parar por medio del terminal PVc el interruptor HOA externo debe estar en la en posicioacuten Auto En la posicioacuten Hand o sea modo manual el terminal PVc puede leer el estado de los arrancadores y de los variadores pero no puede arrancar o parar
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y aseguacuterese de haber completado todos los pasos que aparecen en el capiacutetulo 3 de dicho documento
bull Verifique que hayan completado todos los pasos descritos en el Capiacutetulo 1 de este documento
bull Verifique que todos los dispositivos hayan sido conectados seguacuten el diagrama de cableado CAD Simple Motor Control contenido en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Compruebe que el controlador MicroLogix el variador PowerFlex y el terminal PVc esteacuten conectados a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
19Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 19
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Elementos necesarios
bull CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Computadora personal con el explorador web Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox
bull Terminal PanelView Component
bull Uno o maacutes de los siguientes variadores o arrancadores
bull Variador PowerFlex 4M
bull Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBR
bull Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE
bull Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso puede variar de acuerdo al motor
bull Controlador MicroLogix 1100 oacute 1400
bull Cable en serie nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1761-CBL-PM02
bull Cable USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 2711C-CBL-UU02 o comparable
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para verificar que existe comunicacioacuten entre sus dispositivos y para probar el sistema
Inicio
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
paacutegina 21
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador
MicroLogix paacutegina 22
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
paacutegina 25
20 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
Usted puede obtener acceso al entorno de disentildeo PanelView Explorer a traveacutes de un explorador web Para ello debe conectar su computadora al terminal PVc mediante una conexioacuten USB Antes de conectar su computadora al puerto USB del terminal PVc primero debe instalar el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device en una computadora cuyo sistema operativo sea Windows XP o Windows Vista Despueacutes de instalar el driver puede conectar el terminal PVc a su computadora Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el driver consulte el manual de usuario Terminales HMI PanelView Component publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Conexiones USB del terminal PVc
Todos los terminales PanelView Component permiten la conexioacuten mediante puerto USB y necesitan una computadora que tenga el sistema operativo Windows XP o Windows Vista ademaacutes de tener instalado el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device El driver no se puede instalar en una computadora con el sistema operativo Windows 2000
1 Conecte un extremo de un cable USB al puerto de dispositivos mini-USB de su terminal PVc
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable USB a un puerto USB de su computadora personal
3 Encienda el terminal PVc y la computadora personal
Ventana de inicio de PanelView Explorer
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 21
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU ltFEFF00560065007200770065006e00640065006e0020005300690065002000640069006500730065002000450069006e007300740065006c006c0075006e00670065006e0020007a0075006d002000450072007300740065006c006c0065006e00200076006f006e0020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e002c00200075006d002000650069006e00650020007a0075007600650072006c00e40073007300690067006500200041006e007a006500690067006500200075006e00640020004100750073006700610062006500200076006f006e00200047006500730063006800e40066007400730064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007a0075002000650072007a00690065006c0065006e002e00200044006900650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650020006b00f6006e006e0065006e0020006d006900740020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0064006500720020006d00690074002000640065006d002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200075006e00640020006800f600680065007200200067006500f600660066006e00650074002000770065007200640065006e002egt FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Doacutende comenzar
Siga la ruta indicada a continuacioacuten parar arrancar controlar y monitorear motores de manera simple
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados
publicacioacuten CC-QS001
3Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 3
Doacutende comenzar
Notas
4 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Tabla de contenido
PrefacioIntroduccioacuten 7Convenciones utilizadas en este manual 8Recursos adicionales 9
Capiacutetulo 1Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Introduccioacuten 11Antes de comenzar 11Elementos necesarios 12Siga estos pasos 12Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M 13Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3 16Recursos adicionales 18
Capiacutetulo 2Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten 19Antes de comenzar 19Elementos necesarios 20Siga estos pasos 20Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal 21Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con
el controlador MicroLogix 22Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview 24
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting 25Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting 25Coacutemo interpretar los fallos 28Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 29Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores 30
Recursos adicionales 30Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation 32Contraportada 32
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 5
Tabla de contenido
Notas
6 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Prefacio
Introduccioacuten Esta guiacutea de inicio raacutepido estaacute disentildeada para proporcionar una manera de implementar un componente conectado para control de motor simple Utilizando informacioacuten discreta (sentildeales on-off simples procedentes de contactos) de un variador PowerFlex 4M un arrancador SMC-3 un arrancador 103T o un arrancador 190E este bloque modular muestra un ejemplo de coacutemo se extrae informacioacuten baacutesica importante sobre el estado de un motor y coacutemo esta informacioacuten se visualiza en un terminal PanelView Component (PVc) Se puede utilizar cualquiera de estos arrancadores o variadores (o todos ellos) El variador PowerFlex 4M se utiliza para este bloque modular pero el procedimiento es muy similar para los variadores PowerFlex 4 40 40P y 400
Como ayuda para el disentildeo y la instalacioacuten de su sistema en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001 se incluyen los archivos de aplicacioacuten y maacutes informacioacuten Este CD contiene listas de materiales (BOM) esquemas CAD para configuracioacuten y cableado del panel programas de control pantallas de interface operador-maacutequina (HMI) y otros recursos Con estas herramientas y las mejores praacutecticas de disentildeo incorporadas el disentildeador del sistema queda libre para concentrarse en disentildear el control de la maacutequina sin tener que preocuparse por tareas secundarias al disentildeo
El comienzo de cada capiacutetulo contiene la siguiente informacioacuten Lea estas secciones detalladamente antes de comenzar a trabajar en cada capiacutetulo
bull Antes de comenzar ndash Esta seccioacuten indica los pasos que deben realizarse y las decisiones que deben tomarse antes de comenzar el capiacutetulo Los capiacutetulos contenidos en esta guiacutea de inicio raacutepido no tienen que completarse en el orden en que aparecen No obstante esta seccioacuten define la preparacioacuten miacutenima requerida antes de completar el capiacutetulo correspondiente
bull Elementos necesarios ndash En esta seccioacuten se enumeran las herramientas requeridas para completar los pasos del capiacutetulo Entre ellas figuran sin ser las uacutenicas herramientas de hardware y software
bull Siga estos pasos ndash Esta seccioacuten ilustra los pasos del capiacutetulo e indica queacute pasos se deben seguir para completar los ejemplos
IMPORTANTE Use este documento Bloque modular de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido junto con el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001
En Recursos adicionales en la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de documentos de Inicio raacutepido
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 7
Convenciones utilizadas en este manual
En este manual se emplean las siguientes convenciones
Convencioacuten Significado Ejemplo
Hacer clic Hacer clic una vez con el botoacuten izquierdo del mouse Haga clic en ldquoEditrdquo
Teclear Escribir con el teclado Teclee la direccioacuten IP
Hacer clic con el botoacuten derecho del mouse
Hacer clic una vez con el botoacuten derecho del mouse mientras el cursor estaacute colocado sobre un objeto o seleccioacuten
Haga clic con el botoacuten derecho del mouse en el icono 1768 Bus
Seleccionar Utilizar el mouse para resaltar una opcioacuten especiacutefica Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten
Presionar Presionar una tecla especiacutefica en el teclado o en el bloque de teclas del PowerFlex 4M Presione Enter
Tocar Tocar un botoacuten especiacutefico en el terminal PanelView Component (PVc) Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
8 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Recursos adicionales
Recurso Descripcioacuten
Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo seleccionar productos y coacutemo obtener acceso a informacioacuten sobre el panel y el cableado
CD Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
Proporciona archivos para los bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados
Boletiacuten sobre los moacutedulos de conexioacuten de los arrancadores suaves 150 SMC-3 (1-37A)SMC-Delta (1-32A) 41053-173-01 (1)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre los moacutedulos de conexioacuten al SMC-3
Boletiacuten sobre el arrancador suave 150 SMC-3 (3-37A) 41053-167-01 (5)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre la instalacioacuten y el ajuste del SMC-3
Boletiacuten sobre el releacute de sobrecarga 193 E1 Plus 41053-358-01 (3)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre la instalacioacuten y el ajuste de la sobrecarga
Disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motorprotectores de circuitos de motor 21-301-951-01
Proporciona instrucciones para instalar el MPCB y el MCP
Bloque modular para componentes conectados de control de posicioacuten ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS003
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar y configurar los paraacutemetros del variador PowerFlex 40P con el programa preconfigurado RSLogix 500 que controla su sistema base incluye sugerencias de aplicacioacuten asiacute como informacioacuten para implementar las funciones de copia de seguridad y restauracioacuten de paraacutemetros del variador
MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publicacioacuten 1763-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo usar el controlador programable MicroLogix 1100
MicroLogix 1400 User Manual publicacioacuten 1766-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar el controlador programable MicroLogix 1400
PanelView Component Quick Start Manual publicacioacuten 2711C-QS001A
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar el PanelView Component
Terminales HMI PanelView Component Manual del usuario publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar los terminales HMI del PanelView Component
PowerFlex 4M Manual del usuario publicacioacuten 22F-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 4M y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 4 User Manual publicacioacuten 22A-UM001 Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 4 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 40 User Manual publicacioacuten 22B-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 40P User Manual publicacioacuten 22D-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 400 User Manual publicacioacuten 22C-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
httpwwwabcomdrivesdriveexplorer Proporciona acceso al software DriveExplorerLite
httpwwwabcom Proporciona acceso al sitio web de Allen-Bradley
httprockwellautomationcomknowledgebase Proporciona acceso al autoservicio de asistencia teacutecnica
httpwwwrockwellautomationcomcomponentsconnected
Proporciona acceso al sitio web de componentes conectados
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 9
Notas
10 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 1
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo contiene instrucciones para configurar el variador PowerFlex 4M y el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
En el variador PowerFlex 4M usted configuraraacute dos paraacutemetros Eacutestos son los paraacutemetros baacutesicos que se deben modificar con respecto a los ajustes predeterminados en faacutebrica para que los controladores MicroLogix reciban correctamente la retroalimentacioacuten necesaria En su aplicacioacuten de maacutequina tal vez haya otros paraacutemetros de variador que deban ser ajustados Consulte la documentacioacuten de su variador para obtener informacioacuten sobre otros paraacutemetros del mismo
Asimismo usted ajustaraacute los microinterruptores del controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 que se requieren para enviar la retroalimentacioacuten discreta apropiada al controlador MicroLogix
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y compruebe que haya seguido las recomendaciones sobre disentildeo e instalacioacuten de hardware asiacute como las de instalacioacuten de software
bull Conecte su variador a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
11Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 11
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Elementos necesarios
bull CD Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Uno o maacutes de estos variadores o arrancadoresndash Variador PowerFlex clase 4 (en este documento se utiliza el variador PowerFlex 4M)
bull Los variadores PowerFlex 4M 4 40 y 400 tienen un teclado y una pantalla incorporados para modificar los paraacutemetros
bull En el caso del variador PowerFlex 40P para modificar los paraacutemetros necesita
- Una interface de mano nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 22-HIM-A3o bien
- El software DriveExplorer instalado en la computadora personal y una interface USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1203-USB
ndash Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBRndash Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso variacutea de acuerdo al motor
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para configurar los paraacutemetros en los variadores y ajustar los microinterruptores en el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
Inicio
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M paacutegina 13
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
12 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M
Los valores predeterminados en faacutebrica para los distintos paraacutemetros permiten controlar el variador desde el teclado integrado No es necesario realizar ninguna programacioacuten para iniciar parar cambiar la direccioacuten o controlar la velocidad directamente desde el teclado integrado
No obstante para este bloque modular usted estableceraacute el paraacutemetro P106 [Start Source] para control de 2 conductores En el ejemplo correspondiente a este bloque modular el variador PF 4M se utiliza en modo de control SRC de 2 conductores (surtidor interno) sin inversioacuten SRC es el ajuste predeterminado para los variadores nuevos Si su variador ya ha sido utilizado anteriormente aseguacuterese de que el interruptor SNKSRC (SinkSource) situado bajo la cubierta frontal del variador PF 4M esteacute ajustado en SRC Para otros requerimientos especiacuteficos no contemplados en este ejemplo consulte el manual de usuario del variador PF 4M
Ademaacutes usted modificaraacute el paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Sel] para visualizar lsquoMotorRunningrsquo ya que este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten vea Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores paacutegina 30
Siga este procedimiento para cambiar los paraacutemetros P106 [Start Source] y t221 [Relay Out Sel] por medio del teclado PowerFlex 4M que se describe a continuacioacuten
Teclado del PowerFlex 4M
Tecla Nombre de la tecla
Descripcioacuten
Escapebull Retroceder un paso en el modo de programacioacuten
bull Cancelar el cambio de un valor de paraacutemetro y salir del modo de programacioacuten
Selectbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Seleccionar un diacutegito al visualizar un valor de paraacutemetro
Flecha hacia arriba
bull Desplazarse por los grupos y paraacutemetros
bull Aumentar y disminuir el valor de un diacutegito parpadeanteFlecha hacia abajo
Enterbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Guardar un cambio en el valor de un paraacutemetro
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 13
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
1 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
2 Presione Sel hasta que parpadee el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo
3 Presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
4 Presione Enter
La lsquoP deja de parpadear mientras la tecla numeacuterica del extremo derecho parpadea
Por defecto se visualiza el primer paraacutemetro lsquoPrsquo P101 Si presiona la flecha hacia arriba aumenta el valor de los paraacutemetros lsquoPrsquo si presiona la flecha hacia abajo disminuye dicho valor
5 Presione la flecha hacia arriba cinco veces para visualizar P106
Se visualiza el valor actual del paraacutemetro P106 que en este caso es lsquo0rsquo
6 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo0rsquo parpadea
7 Presione dos veces la flecha hacia arriba para ajustar el valor a lsquo2rsquo
8 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado
El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
9 Presione Esc
P106 se debe visualizar con el valor 6 parpadeando
10 Presione Esc hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
11 Presione la flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo para desplazarse por el menuacute de grupo hasta llegar a la lsquotrsquo
12 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo1rsquo parpadea
Detenga el variador antes de cambiar el paraacutemetro P106
14 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
13 Presione y mantenga presionada la flecha hacia arriba hasta que llegue al valor lsquo221rsquo
Si se pasa presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta regresar al valor lsquo221rsquo
14 Presione dos veces Enter para hacer que el valor lsquo0rsquo parpadee
15 Presione la flecha hacia arriba para desplazarse hasta el valor lsquo2rsquo
16 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
17 Presione Esc
Ahora el paraacutemetro t221 se debe visualizar con el lsquo1rsquo parpadeando
18 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
19 Desconecte la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador hasta que la pantalla quede en blanco y luego vuelva a conectar la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
Ahora su variador estaacute configurado para ser controlado mediante botones y comandos de comunicacioacuten iniciados desde el controlador MicroLogix
Al igual que sucede con todos los bloques modulares eacutestos son ejemplos de coacutemo recuperar informacioacuten de un producto de forma discreta Es posible cambiar el paraacutemetro t221 u otros ajustes de los arrancadores y variadores conforme a los requisitos de su aplicacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 15
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
El controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 se debe establecer para el contactor de aislamiento y para los valores establecidos para el motor A continuacioacuten aparecen los ajustes de microinterruptor utilizados por el controlador SMC-3 y los pasos necesarios para modificarlos
SUGERENCIA El 140M MPCB especificado en la lista de materiales para este bloque modular tiene un disparo de clase 10 No obstante si en el controlador SMC-3 desea utilizar los ajustes de clase de disparo por sobrecarga puede cambiar el 140M MPCB por el 140M MCP
16 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
1 Utilizando el siguiente cuadro estableza los ajustes de microinterruptor de forma que satisfagan las necesidades de arranque de su motor
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 17
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
2 Aseguacuterese de que el microinterruptor 14 tenga el ajuste Normal (apagado)
De ese modo se introduce el contactor de aislamiento cuando el SMC-3 ha recibido la sentildeal de entrada El microinterruptor 14 tambieacuten cierra el contacto auxiliar NA montado lateralmente cuando el arrancador llega a la velocidad deseada El cierre de este contacto auxiliar enviacutea la sentildeal de vuelta al controlador MicroLogix
3 Si cambia a un MCP ajuste los microinterruptores 11 y 12 a la clase apropiada de disparo por sobrecarga
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
IMPORTANTE El arrancador 103T utiliza un 140M MCP (protector de circuitos de motor) que a su vez emplea una sobrecarga separada (E1 Plus) Usted debe ajustar esta sobrecarga conforme a las necesidades de su sistema
El arrancador 190E el arrancador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M deben tener el cuadrante de sobrecarga ajustado a 140M MPCB (disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motor)
18 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 2
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo explica coacutemo confirmar que la comunicacioacuten se estaacute desarrollando del modo deseado entre el controlador MicroLogix y los arrancadores discretos individuales asiacute como entre el controlador MicroLogix y el terminal PanelView Component Para arrancar y parar por medio del terminal PVc el interruptor HOA externo debe estar en la en posicioacuten Auto En la posicioacuten Hand o sea modo manual el terminal PVc puede leer el estado de los arrancadores y de los variadores pero no puede arrancar o parar
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y aseguacuterese de haber completado todos los pasos que aparecen en el capiacutetulo 3 de dicho documento
bull Verifique que hayan completado todos los pasos descritos en el Capiacutetulo 1 de este documento
bull Verifique que todos los dispositivos hayan sido conectados seguacuten el diagrama de cableado CAD Simple Motor Control contenido en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Compruebe que el controlador MicroLogix el variador PowerFlex y el terminal PVc esteacuten conectados a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
19Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 19
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Elementos necesarios
bull CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Computadora personal con el explorador web Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox
bull Terminal PanelView Component
bull Uno o maacutes de los siguientes variadores o arrancadores
bull Variador PowerFlex 4M
bull Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBR
bull Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE
bull Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso puede variar de acuerdo al motor
bull Controlador MicroLogix 1100 oacute 1400
bull Cable en serie nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1761-CBL-PM02
bull Cable USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 2711C-CBL-UU02 o comparable
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para verificar que existe comunicacioacuten entre sus dispositivos y para probar el sistema
Inicio
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
paacutegina 21
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador
MicroLogix paacutegina 22
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
paacutegina 25
20 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
Usted puede obtener acceso al entorno de disentildeo PanelView Explorer a traveacutes de un explorador web Para ello debe conectar su computadora al terminal PVc mediante una conexioacuten USB Antes de conectar su computadora al puerto USB del terminal PVc primero debe instalar el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device en una computadora cuyo sistema operativo sea Windows XP o Windows Vista Despueacutes de instalar el driver puede conectar el terminal PVc a su computadora Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el driver consulte el manual de usuario Terminales HMI PanelView Component publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Conexiones USB del terminal PVc
Todos los terminales PanelView Component permiten la conexioacuten mediante puerto USB y necesitan una computadora que tenga el sistema operativo Windows XP o Windows Vista ademaacutes de tener instalado el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device El driver no se puede instalar en una computadora con el sistema operativo Windows 2000
1 Conecte un extremo de un cable USB al puerto de dispositivos mini-USB de su terminal PVc
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable USB a un puerto USB de su computadora personal
3 Encienda el terminal PVc y la computadora personal
Ventana de inicio de PanelView Explorer
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 21
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Doacutende comenzar
Notas
4 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Tabla de contenido
PrefacioIntroduccioacuten 7Convenciones utilizadas en este manual 8Recursos adicionales 9
Capiacutetulo 1Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Introduccioacuten 11Antes de comenzar 11Elementos necesarios 12Siga estos pasos 12Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M 13Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3 16Recursos adicionales 18
Capiacutetulo 2Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten 19Antes de comenzar 19Elementos necesarios 20Siga estos pasos 20Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal 21Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con
el controlador MicroLogix 22Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview 24
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting 25Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting 25Coacutemo interpretar los fallos 28Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 29Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores 30
Recursos adicionales 30Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation 32Contraportada 32
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 5
Tabla de contenido
Notas
6 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Prefacio
Introduccioacuten Esta guiacutea de inicio raacutepido estaacute disentildeada para proporcionar una manera de implementar un componente conectado para control de motor simple Utilizando informacioacuten discreta (sentildeales on-off simples procedentes de contactos) de un variador PowerFlex 4M un arrancador SMC-3 un arrancador 103T o un arrancador 190E este bloque modular muestra un ejemplo de coacutemo se extrae informacioacuten baacutesica importante sobre el estado de un motor y coacutemo esta informacioacuten se visualiza en un terminal PanelView Component (PVc) Se puede utilizar cualquiera de estos arrancadores o variadores (o todos ellos) El variador PowerFlex 4M se utiliza para este bloque modular pero el procedimiento es muy similar para los variadores PowerFlex 4 40 40P y 400
Como ayuda para el disentildeo y la instalacioacuten de su sistema en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001 se incluyen los archivos de aplicacioacuten y maacutes informacioacuten Este CD contiene listas de materiales (BOM) esquemas CAD para configuracioacuten y cableado del panel programas de control pantallas de interface operador-maacutequina (HMI) y otros recursos Con estas herramientas y las mejores praacutecticas de disentildeo incorporadas el disentildeador del sistema queda libre para concentrarse en disentildear el control de la maacutequina sin tener que preocuparse por tareas secundarias al disentildeo
El comienzo de cada capiacutetulo contiene la siguiente informacioacuten Lea estas secciones detalladamente antes de comenzar a trabajar en cada capiacutetulo
bull Antes de comenzar ndash Esta seccioacuten indica los pasos que deben realizarse y las decisiones que deben tomarse antes de comenzar el capiacutetulo Los capiacutetulos contenidos en esta guiacutea de inicio raacutepido no tienen que completarse en el orden en que aparecen No obstante esta seccioacuten define la preparacioacuten miacutenima requerida antes de completar el capiacutetulo correspondiente
bull Elementos necesarios ndash En esta seccioacuten se enumeran las herramientas requeridas para completar los pasos del capiacutetulo Entre ellas figuran sin ser las uacutenicas herramientas de hardware y software
bull Siga estos pasos ndash Esta seccioacuten ilustra los pasos del capiacutetulo e indica queacute pasos se deben seguir para completar los ejemplos
IMPORTANTE Use este documento Bloque modular de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido junto con el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001
En Recursos adicionales en la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de documentos de Inicio raacutepido
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 7
Convenciones utilizadas en este manual
En este manual se emplean las siguientes convenciones
Convencioacuten Significado Ejemplo
Hacer clic Hacer clic una vez con el botoacuten izquierdo del mouse Haga clic en ldquoEditrdquo
Teclear Escribir con el teclado Teclee la direccioacuten IP
Hacer clic con el botoacuten derecho del mouse
Hacer clic una vez con el botoacuten derecho del mouse mientras el cursor estaacute colocado sobre un objeto o seleccioacuten
Haga clic con el botoacuten derecho del mouse en el icono 1768 Bus
Seleccionar Utilizar el mouse para resaltar una opcioacuten especiacutefica Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten
Presionar Presionar una tecla especiacutefica en el teclado o en el bloque de teclas del PowerFlex 4M Presione Enter
Tocar Tocar un botoacuten especiacutefico en el terminal PanelView Component (PVc) Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
8 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Recursos adicionales
Recurso Descripcioacuten
Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo seleccionar productos y coacutemo obtener acceso a informacioacuten sobre el panel y el cableado
CD Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
Proporciona archivos para los bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados
Boletiacuten sobre los moacutedulos de conexioacuten de los arrancadores suaves 150 SMC-3 (1-37A)SMC-Delta (1-32A) 41053-173-01 (1)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre los moacutedulos de conexioacuten al SMC-3
Boletiacuten sobre el arrancador suave 150 SMC-3 (3-37A) 41053-167-01 (5)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre la instalacioacuten y el ajuste del SMC-3
Boletiacuten sobre el releacute de sobrecarga 193 E1 Plus 41053-358-01 (3)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre la instalacioacuten y el ajuste de la sobrecarga
Disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motorprotectores de circuitos de motor 21-301-951-01
Proporciona instrucciones para instalar el MPCB y el MCP
Bloque modular para componentes conectados de control de posicioacuten ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS003
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar y configurar los paraacutemetros del variador PowerFlex 40P con el programa preconfigurado RSLogix 500 que controla su sistema base incluye sugerencias de aplicacioacuten asiacute como informacioacuten para implementar las funciones de copia de seguridad y restauracioacuten de paraacutemetros del variador
MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publicacioacuten 1763-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo usar el controlador programable MicroLogix 1100
MicroLogix 1400 User Manual publicacioacuten 1766-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar el controlador programable MicroLogix 1400
PanelView Component Quick Start Manual publicacioacuten 2711C-QS001A
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar el PanelView Component
Terminales HMI PanelView Component Manual del usuario publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar los terminales HMI del PanelView Component
PowerFlex 4M Manual del usuario publicacioacuten 22F-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 4M y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 4 User Manual publicacioacuten 22A-UM001 Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 4 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 40 User Manual publicacioacuten 22B-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 40P User Manual publicacioacuten 22D-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 400 User Manual publicacioacuten 22C-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
httpwwwabcomdrivesdriveexplorer Proporciona acceso al software DriveExplorerLite
httpwwwabcom Proporciona acceso al sitio web de Allen-Bradley
httprockwellautomationcomknowledgebase Proporciona acceso al autoservicio de asistencia teacutecnica
httpwwwrockwellautomationcomcomponentsconnected
Proporciona acceso al sitio web de componentes conectados
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 9
Notas
10 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 1
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo contiene instrucciones para configurar el variador PowerFlex 4M y el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
En el variador PowerFlex 4M usted configuraraacute dos paraacutemetros Eacutestos son los paraacutemetros baacutesicos que se deben modificar con respecto a los ajustes predeterminados en faacutebrica para que los controladores MicroLogix reciban correctamente la retroalimentacioacuten necesaria En su aplicacioacuten de maacutequina tal vez haya otros paraacutemetros de variador que deban ser ajustados Consulte la documentacioacuten de su variador para obtener informacioacuten sobre otros paraacutemetros del mismo
Asimismo usted ajustaraacute los microinterruptores del controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 que se requieren para enviar la retroalimentacioacuten discreta apropiada al controlador MicroLogix
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y compruebe que haya seguido las recomendaciones sobre disentildeo e instalacioacuten de hardware asiacute como las de instalacioacuten de software
bull Conecte su variador a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
11Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 11
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Elementos necesarios
bull CD Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Uno o maacutes de estos variadores o arrancadoresndash Variador PowerFlex clase 4 (en este documento se utiliza el variador PowerFlex 4M)
bull Los variadores PowerFlex 4M 4 40 y 400 tienen un teclado y una pantalla incorporados para modificar los paraacutemetros
bull En el caso del variador PowerFlex 40P para modificar los paraacutemetros necesita
- Una interface de mano nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 22-HIM-A3o bien
- El software DriveExplorer instalado en la computadora personal y una interface USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1203-USB
ndash Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBRndash Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso variacutea de acuerdo al motor
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para configurar los paraacutemetros en los variadores y ajustar los microinterruptores en el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
Inicio
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M paacutegina 13
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
12 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M
Los valores predeterminados en faacutebrica para los distintos paraacutemetros permiten controlar el variador desde el teclado integrado No es necesario realizar ninguna programacioacuten para iniciar parar cambiar la direccioacuten o controlar la velocidad directamente desde el teclado integrado
No obstante para este bloque modular usted estableceraacute el paraacutemetro P106 [Start Source] para control de 2 conductores En el ejemplo correspondiente a este bloque modular el variador PF 4M se utiliza en modo de control SRC de 2 conductores (surtidor interno) sin inversioacuten SRC es el ajuste predeterminado para los variadores nuevos Si su variador ya ha sido utilizado anteriormente aseguacuterese de que el interruptor SNKSRC (SinkSource) situado bajo la cubierta frontal del variador PF 4M esteacute ajustado en SRC Para otros requerimientos especiacuteficos no contemplados en este ejemplo consulte el manual de usuario del variador PF 4M
Ademaacutes usted modificaraacute el paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Sel] para visualizar lsquoMotorRunningrsquo ya que este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten vea Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores paacutegina 30
Siga este procedimiento para cambiar los paraacutemetros P106 [Start Source] y t221 [Relay Out Sel] por medio del teclado PowerFlex 4M que se describe a continuacioacuten
Teclado del PowerFlex 4M
Tecla Nombre de la tecla
Descripcioacuten
Escapebull Retroceder un paso en el modo de programacioacuten
bull Cancelar el cambio de un valor de paraacutemetro y salir del modo de programacioacuten
Selectbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Seleccionar un diacutegito al visualizar un valor de paraacutemetro
Flecha hacia arriba
bull Desplazarse por los grupos y paraacutemetros
bull Aumentar y disminuir el valor de un diacutegito parpadeanteFlecha hacia abajo
Enterbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Guardar un cambio en el valor de un paraacutemetro
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 13
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
1 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
2 Presione Sel hasta que parpadee el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo
3 Presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
4 Presione Enter
La lsquoP deja de parpadear mientras la tecla numeacuterica del extremo derecho parpadea
Por defecto se visualiza el primer paraacutemetro lsquoPrsquo P101 Si presiona la flecha hacia arriba aumenta el valor de los paraacutemetros lsquoPrsquo si presiona la flecha hacia abajo disminuye dicho valor
5 Presione la flecha hacia arriba cinco veces para visualizar P106
Se visualiza el valor actual del paraacutemetro P106 que en este caso es lsquo0rsquo
6 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo0rsquo parpadea
7 Presione dos veces la flecha hacia arriba para ajustar el valor a lsquo2rsquo
8 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado
El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
9 Presione Esc
P106 se debe visualizar con el valor 6 parpadeando
10 Presione Esc hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
11 Presione la flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo para desplazarse por el menuacute de grupo hasta llegar a la lsquotrsquo
12 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo1rsquo parpadea
Detenga el variador antes de cambiar el paraacutemetro P106
14 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
13 Presione y mantenga presionada la flecha hacia arriba hasta que llegue al valor lsquo221rsquo
Si se pasa presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta regresar al valor lsquo221rsquo
14 Presione dos veces Enter para hacer que el valor lsquo0rsquo parpadee
15 Presione la flecha hacia arriba para desplazarse hasta el valor lsquo2rsquo
16 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
17 Presione Esc
Ahora el paraacutemetro t221 se debe visualizar con el lsquo1rsquo parpadeando
18 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
19 Desconecte la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador hasta que la pantalla quede en blanco y luego vuelva a conectar la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
Ahora su variador estaacute configurado para ser controlado mediante botones y comandos de comunicacioacuten iniciados desde el controlador MicroLogix
Al igual que sucede con todos los bloques modulares eacutestos son ejemplos de coacutemo recuperar informacioacuten de un producto de forma discreta Es posible cambiar el paraacutemetro t221 u otros ajustes de los arrancadores y variadores conforme a los requisitos de su aplicacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 15
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
El controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 se debe establecer para el contactor de aislamiento y para los valores establecidos para el motor A continuacioacuten aparecen los ajustes de microinterruptor utilizados por el controlador SMC-3 y los pasos necesarios para modificarlos
SUGERENCIA El 140M MPCB especificado en la lista de materiales para este bloque modular tiene un disparo de clase 10 No obstante si en el controlador SMC-3 desea utilizar los ajustes de clase de disparo por sobrecarga puede cambiar el 140M MPCB por el 140M MCP
16 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
1 Utilizando el siguiente cuadro estableza los ajustes de microinterruptor de forma que satisfagan las necesidades de arranque de su motor
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 17
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
2 Aseguacuterese de que el microinterruptor 14 tenga el ajuste Normal (apagado)
De ese modo se introduce el contactor de aislamiento cuando el SMC-3 ha recibido la sentildeal de entrada El microinterruptor 14 tambieacuten cierra el contacto auxiliar NA montado lateralmente cuando el arrancador llega a la velocidad deseada El cierre de este contacto auxiliar enviacutea la sentildeal de vuelta al controlador MicroLogix
3 Si cambia a un MCP ajuste los microinterruptores 11 y 12 a la clase apropiada de disparo por sobrecarga
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
IMPORTANTE El arrancador 103T utiliza un 140M MCP (protector de circuitos de motor) que a su vez emplea una sobrecarga separada (E1 Plus) Usted debe ajustar esta sobrecarga conforme a las necesidades de su sistema
El arrancador 190E el arrancador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M deben tener el cuadrante de sobrecarga ajustado a 140M MPCB (disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motor)
18 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 2
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo explica coacutemo confirmar que la comunicacioacuten se estaacute desarrollando del modo deseado entre el controlador MicroLogix y los arrancadores discretos individuales asiacute como entre el controlador MicroLogix y el terminal PanelView Component Para arrancar y parar por medio del terminal PVc el interruptor HOA externo debe estar en la en posicioacuten Auto En la posicioacuten Hand o sea modo manual el terminal PVc puede leer el estado de los arrancadores y de los variadores pero no puede arrancar o parar
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y aseguacuterese de haber completado todos los pasos que aparecen en el capiacutetulo 3 de dicho documento
bull Verifique que hayan completado todos los pasos descritos en el Capiacutetulo 1 de este documento
bull Verifique que todos los dispositivos hayan sido conectados seguacuten el diagrama de cableado CAD Simple Motor Control contenido en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Compruebe que el controlador MicroLogix el variador PowerFlex y el terminal PVc esteacuten conectados a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
19Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 19
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Elementos necesarios
bull CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Computadora personal con el explorador web Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox
bull Terminal PanelView Component
bull Uno o maacutes de los siguientes variadores o arrancadores
bull Variador PowerFlex 4M
bull Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBR
bull Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE
bull Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso puede variar de acuerdo al motor
bull Controlador MicroLogix 1100 oacute 1400
bull Cable en serie nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1761-CBL-PM02
bull Cable USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 2711C-CBL-UU02 o comparable
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para verificar que existe comunicacioacuten entre sus dispositivos y para probar el sistema
Inicio
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
paacutegina 21
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador
MicroLogix paacutegina 22
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
paacutegina 25
20 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
Usted puede obtener acceso al entorno de disentildeo PanelView Explorer a traveacutes de un explorador web Para ello debe conectar su computadora al terminal PVc mediante una conexioacuten USB Antes de conectar su computadora al puerto USB del terminal PVc primero debe instalar el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device en una computadora cuyo sistema operativo sea Windows XP o Windows Vista Despueacutes de instalar el driver puede conectar el terminal PVc a su computadora Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el driver consulte el manual de usuario Terminales HMI PanelView Component publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Conexiones USB del terminal PVc
Todos los terminales PanelView Component permiten la conexioacuten mediante puerto USB y necesitan una computadora que tenga el sistema operativo Windows XP o Windows Vista ademaacutes de tener instalado el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device El driver no se puede instalar en una computadora con el sistema operativo Windows 2000
1 Conecte un extremo de un cable USB al puerto de dispositivos mini-USB de su terminal PVc
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable USB a un puerto USB de su computadora personal
3 Encienda el terminal PVc y la computadora personal
Ventana de inicio de PanelView Explorer
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 21
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR ltFEFF004200720075006b00200064006900730073006500200069006e006e007300740069006c006c0069006e00670065006e0065002000740069006c002000e50020006f00700070007200650074007400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065007200200073006f006d002000700061007300730065007200200066006f00720020007000e5006c006900740065006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f00670020007500740073006b007200690066007400200061007600200066006f0072007200650074006e0069006e006700730064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50070006e006500730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0067002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f0067002000730065006e006500720065002egt SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Tabla de contenido
PrefacioIntroduccioacuten 7Convenciones utilizadas en este manual 8Recursos adicionales 9
Capiacutetulo 1Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Introduccioacuten 11Antes de comenzar 11Elementos necesarios 12Siga estos pasos 12Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M 13Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3 16Recursos adicionales 18
Capiacutetulo 2Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten 19Antes de comenzar 19Elementos necesarios 20Siga estos pasos 20Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal 21Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con
el controlador MicroLogix 22Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview 24
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting 25Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting 25Coacutemo interpretar los fallos 28Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 29Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores 30
Recursos adicionales 30Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation 32Contraportada 32
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 5
Tabla de contenido
Notas
6 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Prefacio
Introduccioacuten Esta guiacutea de inicio raacutepido estaacute disentildeada para proporcionar una manera de implementar un componente conectado para control de motor simple Utilizando informacioacuten discreta (sentildeales on-off simples procedentes de contactos) de un variador PowerFlex 4M un arrancador SMC-3 un arrancador 103T o un arrancador 190E este bloque modular muestra un ejemplo de coacutemo se extrae informacioacuten baacutesica importante sobre el estado de un motor y coacutemo esta informacioacuten se visualiza en un terminal PanelView Component (PVc) Se puede utilizar cualquiera de estos arrancadores o variadores (o todos ellos) El variador PowerFlex 4M se utiliza para este bloque modular pero el procedimiento es muy similar para los variadores PowerFlex 4 40 40P y 400
Como ayuda para el disentildeo y la instalacioacuten de su sistema en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001 se incluyen los archivos de aplicacioacuten y maacutes informacioacuten Este CD contiene listas de materiales (BOM) esquemas CAD para configuracioacuten y cableado del panel programas de control pantallas de interface operador-maacutequina (HMI) y otros recursos Con estas herramientas y las mejores praacutecticas de disentildeo incorporadas el disentildeador del sistema queda libre para concentrarse en disentildear el control de la maacutequina sin tener que preocuparse por tareas secundarias al disentildeo
El comienzo de cada capiacutetulo contiene la siguiente informacioacuten Lea estas secciones detalladamente antes de comenzar a trabajar en cada capiacutetulo
bull Antes de comenzar ndash Esta seccioacuten indica los pasos que deben realizarse y las decisiones que deben tomarse antes de comenzar el capiacutetulo Los capiacutetulos contenidos en esta guiacutea de inicio raacutepido no tienen que completarse en el orden en que aparecen No obstante esta seccioacuten define la preparacioacuten miacutenima requerida antes de completar el capiacutetulo correspondiente
bull Elementos necesarios ndash En esta seccioacuten se enumeran las herramientas requeridas para completar los pasos del capiacutetulo Entre ellas figuran sin ser las uacutenicas herramientas de hardware y software
bull Siga estos pasos ndash Esta seccioacuten ilustra los pasos del capiacutetulo e indica queacute pasos se deben seguir para completar los ejemplos
IMPORTANTE Use este documento Bloque modular de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido junto con el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001
En Recursos adicionales en la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de documentos de Inicio raacutepido
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 7
Convenciones utilizadas en este manual
En este manual se emplean las siguientes convenciones
Convencioacuten Significado Ejemplo
Hacer clic Hacer clic una vez con el botoacuten izquierdo del mouse Haga clic en ldquoEditrdquo
Teclear Escribir con el teclado Teclee la direccioacuten IP
Hacer clic con el botoacuten derecho del mouse
Hacer clic una vez con el botoacuten derecho del mouse mientras el cursor estaacute colocado sobre un objeto o seleccioacuten
Haga clic con el botoacuten derecho del mouse en el icono 1768 Bus
Seleccionar Utilizar el mouse para resaltar una opcioacuten especiacutefica Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten
Presionar Presionar una tecla especiacutefica en el teclado o en el bloque de teclas del PowerFlex 4M Presione Enter
Tocar Tocar un botoacuten especiacutefico en el terminal PanelView Component (PVc) Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
8 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Recursos adicionales
Recurso Descripcioacuten
Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo seleccionar productos y coacutemo obtener acceso a informacioacuten sobre el panel y el cableado
CD Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
Proporciona archivos para los bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados
Boletiacuten sobre los moacutedulos de conexioacuten de los arrancadores suaves 150 SMC-3 (1-37A)SMC-Delta (1-32A) 41053-173-01 (1)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre los moacutedulos de conexioacuten al SMC-3
Boletiacuten sobre el arrancador suave 150 SMC-3 (3-37A) 41053-167-01 (5)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre la instalacioacuten y el ajuste del SMC-3
Boletiacuten sobre el releacute de sobrecarga 193 E1 Plus 41053-358-01 (3)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre la instalacioacuten y el ajuste de la sobrecarga
Disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motorprotectores de circuitos de motor 21-301-951-01
Proporciona instrucciones para instalar el MPCB y el MCP
Bloque modular para componentes conectados de control de posicioacuten ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS003
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar y configurar los paraacutemetros del variador PowerFlex 40P con el programa preconfigurado RSLogix 500 que controla su sistema base incluye sugerencias de aplicacioacuten asiacute como informacioacuten para implementar las funciones de copia de seguridad y restauracioacuten de paraacutemetros del variador
MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publicacioacuten 1763-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo usar el controlador programable MicroLogix 1100
MicroLogix 1400 User Manual publicacioacuten 1766-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar el controlador programable MicroLogix 1400
PanelView Component Quick Start Manual publicacioacuten 2711C-QS001A
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar el PanelView Component
Terminales HMI PanelView Component Manual del usuario publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar los terminales HMI del PanelView Component
PowerFlex 4M Manual del usuario publicacioacuten 22F-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 4M y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 4 User Manual publicacioacuten 22A-UM001 Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 4 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 40 User Manual publicacioacuten 22B-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 40P User Manual publicacioacuten 22D-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 400 User Manual publicacioacuten 22C-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
httpwwwabcomdrivesdriveexplorer Proporciona acceso al software DriveExplorerLite
httpwwwabcom Proporciona acceso al sitio web de Allen-Bradley
httprockwellautomationcomknowledgebase Proporciona acceso al autoservicio de asistencia teacutecnica
httpwwwrockwellautomationcomcomponentsconnected
Proporciona acceso al sitio web de componentes conectados
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 9
Notas
10 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 1
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo contiene instrucciones para configurar el variador PowerFlex 4M y el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
En el variador PowerFlex 4M usted configuraraacute dos paraacutemetros Eacutestos son los paraacutemetros baacutesicos que se deben modificar con respecto a los ajustes predeterminados en faacutebrica para que los controladores MicroLogix reciban correctamente la retroalimentacioacuten necesaria En su aplicacioacuten de maacutequina tal vez haya otros paraacutemetros de variador que deban ser ajustados Consulte la documentacioacuten de su variador para obtener informacioacuten sobre otros paraacutemetros del mismo
Asimismo usted ajustaraacute los microinterruptores del controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 que se requieren para enviar la retroalimentacioacuten discreta apropiada al controlador MicroLogix
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y compruebe que haya seguido las recomendaciones sobre disentildeo e instalacioacuten de hardware asiacute como las de instalacioacuten de software
bull Conecte su variador a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
11Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 11
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Elementos necesarios
bull CD Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Uno o maacutes de estos variadores o arrancadoresndash Variador PowerFlex clase 4 (en este documento se utiliza el variador PowerFlex 4M)
bull Los variadores PowerFlex 4M 4 40 y 400 tienen un teclado y una pantalla incorporados para modificar los paraacutemetros
bull En el caso del variador PowerFlex 40P para modificar los paraacutemetros necesita
- Una interface de mano nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 22-HIM-A3o bien
- El software DriveExplorer instalado en la computadora personal y una interface USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1203-USB
ndash Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBRndash Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso variacutea de acuerdo al motor
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para configurar los paraacutemetros en los variadores y ajustar los microinterruptores en el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
Inicio
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M paacutegina 13
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
12 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M
Los valores predeterminados en faacutebrica para los distintos paraacutemetros permiten controlar el variador desde el teclado integrado No es necesario realizar ninguna programacioacuten para iniciar parar cambiar la direccioacuten o controlar la velocidad directamente desde el teclado integrado
No obstante para este bloque modular usted estableceraacute el paraacutemetro P106 [Start Source] para control de 2 conductores En el ejemplo correspondiente a este bloque modular el variador PF 4M se utiliza en modo de control SRC de 2 conductores (surtidor interno) sin inversioacuten SRC es el ajuste predeterminado para los variadores nuevos Si su variador ya ha sido utilizado anteriormente aseguacuterese de que el interruptor SNKSRC (SinkSource) situado bajo la cubierta frontal del variador PF 4M esteacute ajustado en SRC Para otros requerimientos especiacuteficos no contemplados en este ejemplo consulte el manual de usuario del variador PF 4M
Ademaacutes usted modificaraacute el paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Sel] para visualizar lsquoMotorRunningrsquo ya que este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten vea Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores paacutegina 30
Siga este procedimiento para cambiar los paraacutemetros P106 [Start Source] y t221 [Relay Out Sel] por medio del teclado PowerFlex 4M que se describe a continuacioacuten
Teclado del PowerFlex 4M
Tecla Nombre de la tecla
Descripcioacuten
Escapebull Retroceder un paso en el modo de programacioacuten
bull Cancelar el cambio de un valor de paraacutemetro y salir del modo de programacioacuten
Selectbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Seleccionar un diacutegito al visualizar un valor de paraacutemetro
Flecha hacia arriba
bull Desplazarse por los grupos y paraacutemetros
bull Aumentar y disminuir el valor de un diacutegito parpadeanteFlecha hacia abajo
Enterbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Guardar un cambio en el valor de un paraacutemetro
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 13
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
1 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
2 Presione Sel hasta que parpadee el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo
3 Presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
4 Presione Enter
La lsquoP deja de parpadear mientras la tecla numeacuterica del extremo derecho parpadea
Por defecto se visualiza el primer paraacutemetro lsquoPrsquo P101 Si presiona la flecha hacia arriba aumenta el valor de los paraacutemetros lsquoPrsquo si presiona la flecha hacia abajo disminuye dicho valor
5 Presione la flecha hacia arriba cinco veces para visualizar P106
Se visualiza el valor actual del paraacutemetro P106 que en este caso es lsquo0rsquo
6 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo0rsquo parpadea
7 Presione dos veces la flecha hacia arriba para ajustar el valor a lsquo2rsquo
8 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado
El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
9 Presione Esc
P106 se debe visualizar con el valor 6 parpadeando
10 Presione Esc hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
11 Presione la flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo para desplazarse por el menuacute de grupo hasta llegar a la lsquotrsquo
12 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo1rsquo parpadea
Detenga el variador antes de cambiar el paraacutemetro P106
14 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
13 Presione y mantenga presionada la flecha hacia arriba hasta que llegue al valor lsquo221rsquo
Si se pasa presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta regresar al valor lsquo221rsquo
14 Presione dos veces Enter para hacer que el valor lsquo0rsquo parpadee
15 Presione la flecha hacia arriba para desplazarse hasta el valor lsquo2rsquo
16 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
17 Presione Esc
Ahora el paraacutemetro t221 se debe visualizar con el lsquo1rsquo parpadeando
18 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
19 Desconecte la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador hasta que la pantalla quede en blanco y luego vuelva a conectar la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
Ahora su variador estaacute configurado para ser controlado mediante botones y comandos de comunicacioacuten iniciados desde el controlador MicroLogix
Al igual que sucede con todos los bloques modulares eacutestos son ejemplos de coacutemo recuperar informacioacuten de un producto de forma discreta Es posible cambiar el paraacutemetro t221 u otros ajustes de los arrancadores y variadores conforme a los requisitos de su aplicacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 15
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
El controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 se debe establecer para el contactor de aislamiento y para los valores establecidos para el motor A continuacioacuten aparecen los ajustes de microinterruptor utilizados por el controlador SMC-3 y los pasos necesarios para modificarlos
SUGERENCIA El 140M MPCB especificado en la lista de materiales para este bloque modular tiene un disparo de clase 10 No obstante si en el controlador SMC-3 desea utilizar los ajustes de clase de disparo por sobrecarga puede cambiar el 140M MPCB por el 140M MCP
16 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
1 Utilizando el siguiente cuadro estableza los ajustes de microinterruptor de forma que satisfagan las necesidades de arranque de su motor
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 17
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
2 Aseguacuterese de que el microinterruptor 14 tenga el ajuste Normal (apagado)
De ese modo se introduce el contactor de aislamiento cuando el SMC-3 ha recibido la sentildeal de entrada El microinterruptor 14 tambieacuten cierra el contacto auxiliar NA montado lateralmente cuando el arrancador llega a la velocidad deseada El cierre de este contacto auxiliar enviacutea la sentildeal de vuelta al controlador MicroLogix
3 Si cambia a un MCP ajuste los microinterruptores 11 y 12 a la clase apropiada de disparo por sobrecarga
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
IMPORTANTE El arrancador 103T utiliza un 140M MCP (protector de circuitos de motor) que a su vez emplea una sobrecarga separada (E1 Plus) Usted debe ajustar esta sobrecarga conforme a las necesidades de su sistema
El arrancador 190E el arrancador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M deben tener el cuadrante de sobrecarga ajustado a 140M MPCB (disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motor)
18 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 2
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo explica coacutemo confirmar que la comunicacioacuten se estaacute desarrollando del modo deseado entre el controlador MicroLogix y los arrancadores discretos individuales asiacute como entre el controlador MicroLogix y el terminal PanelView Component Para arrancar y parar por medio del terminal PVc el interruptor HOA externo debe estar en la en posicioacuten Auto En la posicioacuten Hand o sea modo manual el terminal PVc puede leer el estado de los arrancadores y de los variadores pero no puede arrancar o parar
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y aseguacuterese de haber completado todos los pasos que aparecen en el capiacutetulo 3 de dicho documento
bull Verifique que hayan completado todos los pasos descritos en el Capiacutetulo 1 de este documento
bull Verifique que todos los dispositivos hayan sido conectados seguacuten el diagrama de cableado CAD Simple Motor Control contenido en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Compruebe que el controlador MicroLogix el variador PowerFlex y el terminal PVc esteacuten conectados a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
19Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 19
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Elementos necesarios
bull CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Computadora personal con el explorador web Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox
bull Terminal PanelView Component
bull Uno o maacutes de los siguientes variadores o arrancadores
bull Variador PowerFlex 4M
bull Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBR
bull Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE
bull Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso puede variar de acuerdo al motor
bull Controlador MicroLogix 1100 oacute 1400
bull Cable en serie nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1761-CBL-PM02
bull Cable USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 2711C-CBL-UU02 o comparable
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para verificar que existe comunicacioacuten entre sus dispositivos y para probar el sistema
Inicio
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
paacutegina 21
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador
MicroLogix paacutegina 22
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
paacutegina 25
20 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
Usted puede obtener acceso al entorno de disentildeo PanelView Explorer a traveacutes de un explorador web Para ello debe conectar su computadora al terminal PVc mediante una conexioacuten USB Antes de conectar su computadora al puerto USB del terminal PVc primero debe instalar el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device en una computadora cuyo sistema operativo sea Windows XP o Windows Vista Despueacutes de instalar el driver puede conectar el terminal PVc a su computadora Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el driver consulte el manual de usuario Terminales HMI PanelView Component publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Conexiones USB del terminal PVc
Todos los terminales PanelView Component permiten la conexioacuten mediante puerto USB y necesitan una computadora que tenga el sistema operativo Windows XP o Windows Vista ademaacutes de tener instalado el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device El driver no se puede instalar en una computadora con el sistema operativo Windows 2000
1 Conecte un extremo de un cable USB al puerto de dispositivos mini-USB de su terminal PVc
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable USB a un puerto USB de su computadora personal
3 Encienda el terminal PVc y la computadora personal
Ventana de inicio de PanelView Explorer
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 21
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Tabla de contenido
Notas
6 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Prefacio
Introduccioacuten Esta guiacutea de inicio raacutepido estaacute disentildeada para proporcionar una manera de implementar un componente conectado para control de motor simple Utilizando informacioacuten discreta (sentildeales on-off simples procedentes de contactos) de un variador PowerFlex 4M un arrancador SMC-3 un arrancador 103T o un arrancador 190E este bloque modular muestra un ejemplo de coacutemo se extrae informacioacuten baacutesica importante sobre el estado de un motor y coacutemo esta informacioacuten se visualiza en un terminal PanelView Component (PVc) Se puede utilizar cualquiera de estos arrancadores o variadores (o todos ellos) El variador PowerFlex 4M se utiliza para este bloque modular pero el procedimiento es muy similar para los variadores PowerFlex 4 40 40P y 400
Como ayuda para el disentildeo y la instalacioacuten de su sistema en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001 se incluyen los archivos de aplicacioacuten y maacutes informacioacuten Este CD contiene listas de materiales (BOM) esquemas CAD para configuracioacuten y cableado del panel programas de control pantallas de interface operador-maacutequina (HMI) y otros recursos Con estas herramientas y las mejores praacutecticas de disentildeo incorporadas el disentildeador del sistema queda libre para concentrarse en disentildear el control de la maacutequina sin tener que preocuparse por tareas secundarias al disentildeo
El comienzo de cada capiacutetulo contiene la siguiente informacioacuten Lea estas secciones detalladamente antes de comenzar a trabajar en cada capiacutetulo
bull Antes de comenzar ndash Esta seccioacuten indica los pasos que deben realizarse y las decisiones que deben tomarse antes de comenzar el capiacutetulo Los capiacutetulos contenidos en esta guiacutea de inicio raacutepido no tienen que completarse en el orden en que aparecen No obstante esta seccioacuten define la preparacioacuten miacutenima requerida antes de completar el capiacutetulo correspondiente
bull Elementos necesarios ndash En esta seccioacuten se enumeran las herramientas requeridas para completar los pasos del capiacutetulo Entre ellas figuran sin ser las uacutenicas herramientas de hardware y software
bull Siga estos pasos ndash Esta seccioacuten ilustra los pasos del capiacutetulo e indica queacute pasos se deben seguir para completar los ejemplos
IMPORTANTE Use este documento Bloque modular de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido junto con el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001
En Recursos adicionales en la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de documentos de Inicio raacutepido
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 7
Convenciones utilizadas en este manual
En este manual se emplean las siguientes convenciones
Convencioacuten Significado Ejemplo
Hacer clic Hacer clic una vez con el botoacuten izquierdo del mouse Haga clic en ldquoEditrdquo
Teclear Escribir con el teclado Teclee la direccioacuten IP
Hacer clic con el botoacuten derecho del mouse
Hacer clic una vez con el botoacuten derecho del mouse mientras el cursor estaacute colocado sobre un objeto o seleccioacuten
Haga clic con el botoacuten derecho del mouse en el icono 1768 Bus
Seleccionar Utilizar el mouse para resaltar una opcioacuten especiacutefica Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten
Presionar Presionar una tecla especiacutefica en el teclado o en el bloque de teclas del PowerFlex 4M Presione Enter
Tocar Tocar un botoacuten especiacutefico en el terminal PanelView Component (PVc) Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
8 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Recursos adicionales
Recurso Descripcioacuten
Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo seleccionar productos y coacutemo obtener acceso a informacioacuten sobre el panel y el cableado
CD Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
Proporciona archivos para los bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados
Boletiacuten sobre los moacutedulos de conexioacuten de los arrancadores suaves 150 SMC-3 (1-37A)SMC-Delta (1-32A) 41053-173-01 (1)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre los moacutedulos de conexioacuten al SMC-3
Boletiacuten sobre el arrancador suave 150 SMC-3 (3-37A) 41053-167-01 (5)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre la instalacioacuten y el ajuste del SMC-3
Boletiacuten sobre el releacute de sobrecarga 193 E1 Plus 41053-358-01 (3)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre la instalacioacuten y el ajuste de la sobrecarga
Disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motorprotectores de circuitos de motor 21-301-951-01
Proporciona instrucciones para instalar el MPCB y el MCP
Bloque modular para componentes conectados de control de posicioacuten ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS003
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar y configurar los paraacutemetros del variador PowerFlex 40P con el programa preconfigurado RSLogix 500 que controla su sistema base incluye sugerencias de aplicacioacuten asiacute como informacioacuten para implementar las funciones de copia de seguridad y restauracioacuten de paraacutemetros del variador
MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publicacioacuten 1763-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo usar el controlador programable MicroLogix 1100
MicroLogix 1400 User Manual publicacioacuten 1766-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar el controlador programable MicroLogix 1400
PanelView Component Quick Start Manual publicacioacuten 2711C-QS001A
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar el PanelView Component
Terminales HMI PanelView Component Manual del usuario publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar los terminales HMI del PanelView Component
PowerFlex 4M Manual del usuario publicacioacuten 22F-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 4M y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 4 User Manual publicacioacuten 22A-UM001 Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 4 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 40 User Manual publicacioacuten 22B-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 40P User Manual publicacioacuten 22D-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 400 User Manual publicacioacuten 22C-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
httpwwwabcomdrivesdriveexplorer Proporciona acceso al software DriveExplorerLite
httpwwwabcom Proporciona acceso al sitio web de Allen-Bradley
httprockwellautomationcomknowledgebase Proporciona acceso al autoservicio de asistencia teacutecnica
httpwwwrockwellautomationcomcomponentsconnected
Proporciona acceso al sitio web de componentes conectados
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 9
Notas
10 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 1
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo contiene instrucciones para configurar el variador PowerFlex 4M y el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
En el variador PowerFlex 4M usted configuraraacute dos paraacutemetros Eacutestos son los paraacutemetros baacutesicos que se deben modificar con respecto a los ajustes predeterminados en faacutebrica para que los controladores MicroLogix reciban correctamente la retroalimentacioacuten necesaria En su aplicacioacuten de maacutequina tal vez haya otros paraacutemetros de variador que deban ser ajustados Consulte la documentacioacuten de su variador para obtener informacioacuten sobre otros paraacutemetros del mismo
Asimismo usted ajustaraacute los microinterruptores del controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 que se requieren para enviar la retroalimentacioacuten discreta apropiada al controlador MicroLogix
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y compruebe que haya seguido las recomendaciones sobre disentildeo e instalacioacuten de hardware asiacute como las de instalacioacuten de software
bull Conecte su variador a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
11Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 11
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Elementos necesarios
bull CD Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Uno o maacutes de estos variadores o arrancadoresndash Variador PowerFlex clase 4 (en este documento se utiliza el variador PowerFlex 4M)
bull Los variadores PowerFlex 4M 4 40 y 400 tienen un teclado y una pantalla incorporados para modificar los paraacutemetros
bull En el caso del variador PowerFlex 40P para modificar los paraacutemetros necesita
- Una interface de mano nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 22-HIM-A3o bien
- El software DriveExplorer instalado en la computadora personal y una interface USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1203-USB
ndash Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBRndash Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso variacutea de acuerdo al motor
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para configurar los paraacutemetros en los variadores y ajustar los microinterruptores en el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
Inicio
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M paacutegina 13
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
12 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M
Los valores predeterminados en faacutebrica para los distintos paraacutemetros permiten controlar el variador desde el teclado integrado No es necesario realizar ninguna programacioacuten para iniciar parar cambiar la direccioacuten o controlar la velocidad directamente desde el teclado integrado
No obstante para este bloque modular usted estableceraacute el paraacutemetro P106 [Start Source] para control de 2 conductores En el ejemplo correspondiente a este bloque modular el variador PF 4M se utiliza en modo de control SRC de 2 conductores (surtidor interno) sin inversioacuten SRC es el ajuste predeterminado para los variadores nuevos Si su variador ya ha sido utilizado anteriormente aseguacuterese de que el interruptor SNKSRC (SinkSource) situado bajo la cubierta frontal del variador PF 4M esteacute ajustado en SRC Para otros requerimientos especiacuteficos no contemplados en este ejemplo consulte el manual de usuario del variador PF 4M
Ademaacutes usted modificaraacute el paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Sel] para visualizar lsquoMotorRunningrsquo ya que este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten vea Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores paacutegina 30
Siga este procedimiento para cambiar los paraacutemetros P106 [Start Source] y t221 [Relay Out Sel] por medio del teclado PowerFlex 4M que se describe a continuacioacuten
Teclado del PowerFlex 4M
Tecla Nombre de la tecla
Descripcioacuten
Escapebull Retroceder un paso en el modo de programacioacuten
bull Cancelar el cambio de un valor de paraacutemetro y salir del modo de programacioacuten
Selectbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Seleccionar un diacutegito al visualizar un valor de paraacutemetro
Flecha hacia arriba
bull Desplazarse por los grupos y paraacutemetros
bull Aumentar y disminuir el valor de un diacutegito parpadeanteFlecha hacia abajo
Enterbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Guardar un cambio en el valor de un paraacutemetro
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 13
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
1 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
2 Presione Sel hasta que parpadee el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo
3 Presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
4 Presione Enter
La lsquoP deja de parpadear mientras la tecla numeacuterica del extremo derecho parpadea
Por defecto se visualiza el primer paraacutemetro lsquoPrsquo P101 Si presiona la flecha hacia arriba aumenta el valor de los paraacutemetros lsquoPrsquo si presiona la flecha hacia abajo disminuye dicho valor
5 Presione la flecha hacia arriba cinco veces para visualizar P106
Se visualiza el valor actual del paraacutemetro P106 que en este caso es lsquo0rsquo
6 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo0rsquo parpadea
7 Presione dos veces la flecha hacia arriba para ajustar el valor a lsquo2rsquo
8 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado
El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
9 Presione Esc
P106 se debe visualizar con el valor 6 parpadeando
10 Presione Esc hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
11 Presione la flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo para desplazarse por el menuacute de grupo hasta llegar a la lsquotrsquo
12 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo1rsquo parpadea
Detenga el variador antes de cambiar el paraacutemetro P106
14 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
13 Presione y mantenga presionada la flecha hacia arriba hasta que llegue al valor lsquo221rsquo
Si se pasa presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta regresar al valor lsquo221rsquo
14 Presione dos veces Enter para hacer que el valor lsquo0rsquo parpadee
15 Presione la flecha hacia arriba para desplazarse hasta el valor lsquo2rsquo
16 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
17 Presione Esc
Ahora el paraacutemetro t221 se debe visualizar con el lsquo1rsquo parpadeando
18 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
19 Desconecte la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador hasta que la pantalla quede en blanco y luego vuelva a conectar la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
Ahora su variador estaacute configurado para ser controlado mediante botones y comandos de comunicacioacuten iniciados desde el controlador MicroLogix
Al igual que sucede con todos los bloques modulares eacutestos son ejemplos de coacutemo recuperar informacioacuten de un producto de forma discreta Es posible cambiar el paraacutemetro t221 u otros ajustes de los arrancadores y variadores conforme a los requisitos de su aplicacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 15
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
El controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 se debe establecer para el contactor de aislamiento y para los valores establecidos para el motor A continuacioacuten aparecen los ajustes de microinterruptor utilizados por el controlador SMC-3 y los pasos necesarios para modificarlos
SUGERENCIA El 140M MPCB especificado en la lista de materiales para este bloque modular tiene un disparo de clase 10 No obstante si en el controlador SMC-3 desea utilizar los ajustes de clase de disparo por sobrecarga puede cambiar el 140M MPCB por el 140M MCP
16 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
1 Utilizando el siguiente cuadro estableza los ajustes de microinterruptor de forma que satisfagan las necesidades de arranque de su motor
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 17
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
2 Aseguacuterese de que el microinterruptor 14 tenga el ajuste Normal (apagado)
De ese modo se introduce el contactor de aislamiento cuando el SMC-3 ha recibido la sentildeal de entrada El microinterruptor 14 tambieacuten cierra el contacto auxiliar NA montado lateralmente cuando el arrancador llega a la velocidad deseada El cierre de este contacto auxiliar enviacutea la sentildeal de vuelta al controlador MicroLogix
3 Si cambia a un MCP ajuste los microinterruptores 11 y 12 a la clase apropiada de disparo por sobrecarga
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
IMPORTANTE El arrancador 103T utiliza un 140M MCP (protector de circuitos de motor) que a su vez emplea una sobrecarga separada (E1 Plus) Usted debe ajustar esta sobrecarga conforme a las necesidades de su sistema
El arrancador 190E el arrancador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M deben tener el cuadrante de sobrecarga ajustado a 140M MPCB (disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motor)
18 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 2
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo explica coacutemo confirmar que la comunicacioacuten se estaacute desarrollando del modo deseado entre el controlador MicroLogix y los arrancadores discretos individuales asiacute como entre el controlador MicroLogix y el terminal PanelView Component Para arrancar y parar por medio del terminal PVc el interruptor HOA externo debe estar en la en posicioacuten Auto En la posicioacuten Hand o sea modo manual el terminal PVc puede leer el estado de los arrancadores y de los variadores pero no puede arrancar o parar
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y aseguacuterese de haber completado todos los pasos que aparecen en el capiacutetulo 3 de dicho documento
bull Verifique que hayan completado todos los pasos descritos en el Capiacutetulo 1 de este documento
bull Verifique que todos los dispositivos hayan sido conectados seguacuten el diagrama de cableado CAD Simple Motor Control contenido en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Compruebe que el controlador MicroLogix el variador PowerFlex y el terminal PVc esteacuten conectados a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
19Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 19
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Elementos necesarios
bull CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Computadora personal con el explorador web Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox
bull Terminal PanelView Component
bull Uno o maacutes de los siguientes variadores o arrancadores
bull Variador PowerFlex 4M
bull Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBR
bull Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE
bull Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso puede variar de acuerdo al motor
bull Controlador MicroLogix 1100 oacute 1400
bull Cable en serie nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1761-CBL-PM02
bull Cable USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 2711C-CBL-UU02 o comparable
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para verificar que existe comunicacioacuten entre sus dispositivos y para probar el sistema
Inicio
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
paacutegina 21
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador
MicroLogix paacutegina 22
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
paacutegina 25
20 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
Usted puede obtener acceso al entorno de disentildeo PanelView Explorer a traveacutes de un explorador web Para ello debe conectar su computadora al terminal PVc mediante una conexioacuten USB Antes de conectar su computadora al puerto USB del terminal PVc primero debe instalar el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device en una computadora cuyo sistema operativo sea Windows XP o Windows Vista Despueacutes de instalar el driver puede conectar el terminal PVc a su computadora Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el driver consulte el manual de usuario Terminales HMI PanelView Component publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Conexiones USB del terminal PVc
Todos los terminales PanelView Component permiten la conexioacuten mediante puerto USB y necesitan una computadora que tenga el sistema operativo Windows XP o Windows Vista ademaacutes de tener instalado el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device El driver no se puede instalar en una computadora con el sistema operativo Windows 2000
1 Conecte un extremo de un cable USB al puerto de dispositivos mini-USB de su terminal PVc
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable USB a un puerto USB de su computadora personal
3 Encienda el terminal PVc y la computadora personal
Ventana de inicio de PanelView Explorer
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 21
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA ltFEFF004f007000740069006f006e00730020007000650072006d0065007400740061006e007400200064006500200063007200e900650072002000640065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400730020005000440046002000700072006f00660065007300730069006f006e006e0065006c007300200066006900610062006c0065007300200070006f007500720020006c0061002000760069007300750061006c00690073006100740069006f006e0020006500740020006c00270069006d007000720065007300730069006f006e002e00200049006c002000650073007400200070006f0073007300690062006c0065002000640027006f00750076007200690072002000630065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400730020005000440046002000640061006e00730020004100630072006f0062006100740020006500740020005200650061006400650072002c002000760065007200730069006f006e002000200035002e00300020006f007500200075006c007400e9007200690065007500720065002egt PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD ltFEFF004700650062007200750069006b002000640065007a006500200069006e007300740065006c006c0069006e00670065006e0020006f006d0020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007400650020006d0061006b0065006e00200064006900650020006700650073006300680069006b00740020007a0069006a006e0020006f006d0020007a0061006b0065006c0069006a006b006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e00200062006500740072006f0075007700620061006100720020007700650065007200200074006500200067006500760065006e00200065006e0020006100660020007400650020006400720075006b006b0065006e002e0020004400650020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0075006e006e0065006e00200077006f007200640065006e002000670065006f00700065006e00640020006d006500740020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006e002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006e00200068006f006700650072002egt ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA ltFEFF00550073006100720065002000710075006500730074006500200069006d0070006f007300740061007a0069006f006e00690020007000650072002000630072006500610072006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400690020005000440046002000610064006100740074006900200070006500720020006c00610020007300740061006d00700061002000650020006c0061002000760069007300750061006c0069007a007a0061007a0069006f006e006500200064006900200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006900200061007a00690065006e00640061006c0069002e0020004900200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740069002000500044004600200070006f00730073006f006e006f0020006500730073006500720065002000610070006500720074006900200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065002000760065007200730069006f006e006900200073007500630063006500730073006900760065002egt NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Prefacio
Introduccioacuten Esta guiacutea de inicio raacutepido estaacute disentildeada para proporcionar una manera de implementar un componente conectado para control de motor simple Utilizando informacioacuten discreta (sentildeales on-off simples procedentes de contactos) de un variador PowerFlex 4M un arrancador SMC-3 un arrancador 103T o un arrancador 190E este bloque modular muestra un ejemplo de coacutemo se extrae informacioacuten baacutesica importante sobre el estado de un motor y coacutemo esta informacioacuten se visualiza en un terminal PanelView Component (PVc) Se puede utilizar cualquiera de estos arrancadores o variadores (o todos ellos) El variador PowerFlex 4M se utiliza para este bloque modular pero el procedimiento es muy similar para los variadores PowerFlex 4 40 40P y 400
Como ayuda para el disentildeo y la instalacioacuten de su sistema en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001 se incluyen los archivos de aplicacioacuten y maacutes informacioacuten Este CD contiene listas de materiales (BOM) esquemas CAD para configuracioacuten y cableado del panel programas de control pantallas de interface operador-maacutequina (HMI) y otros recursos Con estas herramientas y las mejores praacutecticas de disentildeo incorporadas el disentildeador del sistema queda libre para concentrarse en disentildear el control de la maacutequina sin tener que preocuparse por tareas secundarias al disentildeo
El comienzo de cada capiacutetulo contiene la siguiente informacioacuten Lea estas secciones detalladamente antes de comenzar a trabajar en cada capiacutetulo
bull Antes de comenzar ndash Esta seccioacuten indica los pasos que deben realizarse y las decisiones que deben tomarse antes de comenzar el capiacutetulo Los capiacutetulos contenidos en esta guiacutea de inicio raacutepido no tienen que completarse en el orden en que aparecen No obstante esta seccioacuten define la preparacioacuten miacutenima requerida antes de completar el capiacutetulo correspondiente
bull Elementos necesarios ndash En esta seccioacuten se enumeran las herramientas requeridas para completar los pasos del capiacutetulo Entre ellas figuran sin ser las uacutenicas herramientas de hardware y software
bull Siga estos pasos ndash Esta seccioacuten ilustra los pasos del capiacutetulo e indica queacute pasos se deben seguir para completar los ejemplos
IMPORTANTE Use este documento Bloque modular de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido junto con el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001
En Recursos adicionales en la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de documentos de Inicio raacutepido
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 7
Convenciones utilizadas en este manual
En este manual se emplean las siguientes convenciones
Convencioacuten Significado Ejemplo
Hacer clic Hacer clic una vez con el botoacuten izquierdo del mouse Haga clic en ldquoEditrdquo
Teclear Escribir con el teclado Teclee la direccioacuten IP
Hacer clic con el botoacuten derecho del mouse
Hacer clic una vez con el botoacuten derecho del mouse mientras el cursor estaacute colocado sobre un objeto o seleccioacuten
Haga clic con el botoacuten derecho del mouse en el icono 1768 Bus
Seleccionar Utilizar el mouse para resaltar una opcioacuten especiacutefica Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten
Presionar Presionar una tecla especiacutefica en el teclado o en el bloque de teclas del PowerFlex 4M Presione Enter
Tocar Tocar un botoacuten especiacutefico en el terminal PanelView Component (PVc) Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
8 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Recursos adicionales
Recurso Descripcioacuten
Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo seleccionar productos y coacutemo obtener acceso a informacioacuten sobre el panel y el cableado
CD Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
Proporciona archivos para los bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados
Boletiacuten sobre los moacutedulos de conexioacuten de los arrancadores suaves 150 SMC-3 (1-37A)SMC-Delta (1-32A) 41053-173-01 (1)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre los moacutedulos de conexioacuten al SMC-3
Boletiacuten sobre el arrancador suave 150 SMC-3 (3-37A) 41053-167-01 (5)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre la instalacioacuten y el ajuste del SMC-3
Boletiacuten sobre el releacute de sobrecarga 193 E1 Plus 41053-358-01 (3)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre la instalacioacuten y el ajuste de la sobrecarga
Disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motorprotectores de circuitos de motor 21-301-951-01
Proporciona instrucciones para instalar el MPCB y el MCP
Bloque modular para componentes conectados de control de posicioacuten ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS003
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar y configurar los paraacutemetros del variador PowerFlex 40P con el programa preconfigurado RSLogix 500 que controla su sistema base incluye sugerencias de aplicacioacuten asiacute como informacioacuten para implementar las funciones de copia de seguridad y restauracioacuten de paraacutemetros del variador
MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publicacioacuten 1763-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo usar el controlador programable MicroLogix 1100
MicroLogix 1400 User Manual publicacioacuten 1766-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar el controlador programable MicroLogix 1400
PanelView Component Quick Start Manual publicacioacuten 2711C-QS001A
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar el PanelView Component
Terminales HMI PanelView Component Manual del usuario publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar los terminales HMI del PanelView Component
PowerFlex 4M Manual del usuario publicacioacuten 22F-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 4M y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 4 User Manual publicacioacuten 22A-UM001 Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 4 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 40 User Manual publicacioacuten 22B-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 40P User Manual publicacioacuten 22D-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 400 User Manual publicacioacuten 22C-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
httpwwwabcomdrivesdriveexplorer Proporciona acceso al software DriveExplorerLite
httpwwwabcom Proporciona acceso al sitio web de Allen-Bradley
httprockwellautomationcomknowledgebase Proporciona acceso al autoservicio de asistencia teacutecnica
httpwwwrockwellautomationcomcomponentsconnected
Proporciona acceso al sitio web de componentes conectados
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 9
Notas
10 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 1
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo contiene instrucciones para configurar el variador PowerFlex 4M y el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
En el variador PowerFlex 4M usted configuraraacute dos paraacutemetros Eacutestos son los paraacutemetros baacutesicos que se deben modificar con respecto a los ajustes predeterminados en faacutebrica para que los controladores MicroLogix reciban correctamente la retroalimentacioacuten necesaria En su aplicacioacuten de maacutequina tal vez haya otros paraacutemetros de variador que deban ser ajustados Consulte la documentacioacuten de su variador para obtener informacioacuten sobre otros paraacutemetros del mismo
Asimismo usted ajustaraacute los microinterruptores del controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 que se requieren para enviar la retroalimentacioacuten discreta apropiada al controlador MicroLogix
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y compruebe que haya seguido las recomendaciones sobre disentildeo e instalacioacuten de hardware asiacute como las de instalacioacuten de software
bull Conecte su variador a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
11Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 11
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Elementos necesarios
bull CD Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Uno o maacutes de estos variadores o arrancadoresndash Variador PowerFlex clase 4 (en este documento se utiliza el variador PowerFlex 4M)
bull Los variadores PowerFlex 4M 4 40 y 400 tienen un teclado y una pantalla incorporados para modificar los paraacutemetros
bull En el caso del variador PowerFlex 40P para modificar los paraacutemetros necesita
- Una interface de mano nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 22-HIM-A3o bien
- El software DriveExplorer instalado en la computadora personal y una interface USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1203-USB
ndash Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBRndash Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso variacutea de acuerdo al motor
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para configurar los paraacutemetros en los variadores y ajustar los microinterruptores en el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
Inicio
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M paacutegina 13
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
12 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M
Los valores predeterminados en faacutebrica para los distintos paraacutemetros permiten controlar el variador desde el teclado integrado No es necesario realizar ninguna programacioacuten para iniciar parar cambiar la direccioacuten o controlar la velocidad directamente desde el teclado integrado
No obstante para este bloque modular usted estableceraacute el paraacutemetro P106 [Start Source] para control de 2 conductores En el ejemplo correspondiente a este bloque modular el variador PF 4M se utiliza en modo de control SRC de 2 conductores (surtidor interno) sin inversioacuten SRC es el ajuste predeterminado para los variadores nuevos Si su variador ya ha sido utilizado anteriormente aseguacuterese de que el interruptor SNKSRC (SinkSource) situado bajo la cubierta frontal del variador PF 4M esteacute ajustado en SRC Para otros requerimientos especiacuteficos no contemplados en este ejemplo consulte el manual de usuario del variador PF 4M
Ademaacutes usted modificaraacute el paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Sel] para visualizar lsquoMotorRunningrsquo ya que este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten vea Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores paacutegina 30
Siga este procedimiento para cambiar los paraacutemetros P106 [Start Source] y t221 [Relay Out Sel] por medio del teclado PowerFlex 4M que se describe a continuacioacuten
Teclado del PowerFlex 4M
Tecla Nombre de la tecla
Descripcioacuten
Escapebull Retroceder un paso en el modo de programacioacuten
bull Cancelar el cambio de un valor de paraacutemetro y salir del modo de programacioacuten
Selectbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Seleccionar un diacutegito al visualizar un valor de paraacutemetro
Flecha hacia arriba
bull Desplazarse por los grupos y paraacutemetros
bull Aumentar y disminuir el valor de un diacutegito parpadeanteFlecha hacia abajo
Enterbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Guardar un cambio en el valor de un paraacutemetro
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 13
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
1 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
2 Presione Sel hasta que parpadee el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo
3 Presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
4 Presione Enter
La lsquoP deja de parpadear mientras la tecla numeacuterica del extremo derecho parpadea
Por defecto se visualiza el primer paraacutemetro lsquoPrsquo P101 Si presiona la flecha hacia arriba aumenta el valor de los paraacutemetros lsquoPrsquo si presiona la flecha hacia abajo disminuye dicho valor
5 Presione la flecha hacia arriba cinco veces para visualizar P106
Se visualiza el valor actual del paraacutemetro P106 que en este caso es lsquo0rsquo
6 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo0rsquo parpadea
7 Presione dos veces la flecha hacia arriba para ajustar el valor a lsquo2rsquo
8 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado
El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
9 Presione Esc
P106 se debe visualizar con el valor 6 parpadeando
10 Presione Esc hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
11 Presione la flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo para desplazarse por el menuacute de grupo hasta llegar a la lsquotrsquo
12 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo1rsquo parpadea
Detenga el variador antes de cambiar el paraacutemetro P106
14 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
13 Presione y mantenga presionada la flecha hacia arriba hasta que llegue al valor lsquo221rsquo
Si se pasa presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta regresar al valor lsquo221rsquo
14 Presione dos veces Enter para hacer que el valor lsquo0rsquo parpadee
15 Presione la flecha hacia arriba para desplazarse hasta el valor lsquo2rsquo
16 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
17 Presione Esc
Ahora el paraacutemetro t221 se debe visualizar con el lsquo1rsquo parpadeando
18 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
19 Desconecte la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador hasta que la pantalla quede en blanco y luego vuelva a conectar la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
Ahora su variador estaacute configurado para ser controlado mediante botones y comandos de comunicacioacuten iniciados desde el controlador MicroLogix
Al igual que sucede con todos los bloques modulares eacutestos son ejemplos de coacutemo recuperar informacioacuten de un producto de forma discreta Es posible cambiar el paraacutemetro t221 u otros ajustes de los arrancadores y variadores conforme a los requisitos de su aplicacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 15
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
El controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 se debe establecer para el contactor de aislamiento y para los valores establecidos para el motor A continuacioacuten aparecen los ajustes de microinterruptor utilizados por el controlador SMC-3 y los pasos necesarios para modificarlos
SUGERENCIA El 140M MPCB especificado en la lista de materiales para este bloque modular tiene un disparo de clase 10 No obstante si en el controlador SMC-3 desea utilizar los ajustes de clase de disparo por sobrecarga puede cambiar el 140M MPCB por el 140M MCP
16 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
1 Utilizando el siguiente cuadro estableza los ajustes de microinterruptor de forma que satisfagan las necesidades de arranque de su motor
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 17
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
2 Aseguacuterese de que el microinterruptor 14 tenga el ajuste Normal (apagado)
De ese modo se introduce el contactor de aislamiento cuando el SMC-3 ha recibido la sentildeal de entrada El microinterruptor 14 tambieacuten cierra el contacto auxiliar NA montado lateralmente cuando el arrancador llega a la velocidad deseada El cierre de este contacto auxiliar enviacutea la sentildeal de vuelta al controlador MicroLogix
3 Si cambia a un MCP ajuste los microinterruptores 11 y 12 a la clase apropiada de disparo por sobrecarga
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
IMPORTANTE El arrancador 103T utiliza un 140M MCP (protector de circuitos de motor) que a su vez emplea una sobrecarga separada (E1 Plus) Usted debe ajustar esta sobrecarga conforme a las necesidades de su sistema
El arrancador 190E el arrancador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M deben tener el cuadrante de sobrecarga ajustado a 140M MPCB (disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motor)
18 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 2
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo explica coacutemo confirmar que la comunicacioacuten se estaacute desarrollando del modo deseado entre el controlador MicroLogix y los arrancadores discretos individuales asiacute como entre el controlador MicroLogix y el terminal PanelView Component Para arrancar y parar por medio del terminal PVc el interruptor HOA externo debe estar en la en posicioacuten Auto En la posicioacuten Hand o sea modo manual el terminal PVc puede leer el estado de los arrancadores y de los variadores pero no puede arrancar o parar
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y aseguacuterese de haber completado todos los pasos que aparecen en el capiacutetulo 3 de dicho documento
bull Verifique que hayan completado todos los pasos descritos en el Capiacutetulo 1 de este documento
bull Verifique que todos los dispositivos hayan sido conectados seguacuten el diagrama de cableado CAD Simple Motor Control contenido en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Compruebe que el controlador MicroLogix el variador PowerFlex y el terminal PVc esteacuten conectados a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
19Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 19
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Elementos necesarios
bull CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Computadora personal con el explorador web Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox
bull Terminal PanelView Component
bull Uno o maacutes de los siguientes variadores o arrancadores
bull Variador PowerFlex 4M
bull Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBR
bull Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE
bull Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso puede variar de acuerdo al motor
bull Controlador MicroLogix 1100 oacute 1400
bull Cable en serie nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1761-CBL-PM02
bull Cable USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 2711C-CBL-UU02 o comparable
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para verificar que existe comunicacioacuten entre sus dispositivos y para probar el sistema
Inicio
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
paacutegina 21
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador
MicroLogix paacutegina 22
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
paacutegina 25
20 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
Usted puede obtener acceso al entorno de disentildeo PanelView Explorer a traveacutes de un explorador web Para ello debe conectar su computadora al terminal PVc mediante una conexioacuten USB Antes de conectar su computadora al puerto USB del terminal PVc primero debe instalar el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device en una computadora cuyo sistema operativo sea Windows XP o Windows Vista Despueacutes de instalar el driver puede conectar el terminal PVc a su computadora Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el driver consulte el manual de usuario Terminales HMI PanelView Component publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Conexiones USB del terminal PVc
Todos los terminales PanelView Component permiten la conexioacuten mediante puerto USB y necesitan una computadora que tenga el sistema operativo Windows XP o Windows Vista ademaacutes de tener instalado el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device El driver no se puede instalar en una computadora con el sistema operativo Windows 2000
1 Conecte un extremo de un cable USB al puerto de dispositivos mini-USB de su terminal PVc
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable USB a un puerto USB de su computadora personal
3 Encienda el terminal PVc y la computadora personal
Ventana de inicio de PanelView Explorer
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 21
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Convenciones utilizadas en este manual
En este manual se emplean las siguientes convenciones
Convencioacuten Significado Ejemplo
Hacer clic Hacer clic una vez con el botoacuten izquierdo del mouse Haga clic en ldquoEditrdquo
Teclear Escribir con el teclado Teclee la direccioacuten IP
Hacer clic con el botoacuten derecho del mouse
Hacer clic una vez con el botoacuten derecho del mouse mientras el cursor estaacute colocado sobre un objeto o seleccioacuten
Haga clic con el botoacuten derecho del mouse en el icono 1768 Bus
Seleccionar Utilizar el mouse para resaltar una opcioacuten especiacutefica Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten
Presionar Presionar una tecla especiacutefica en el teclado o en el bloque de teclas del PowerFlex 4M Presione Enter
Tocar Tocar un botoacuten especiacutefico en el terminal PanelView Component (PVc) Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
8 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Recursos adicionales
Recurso Descripcioacuten
Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo seleccionar productos y coacutemo obtener acceso a informacioacuten sobre el panel y el cableado
CD Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
Proporciona archivos para los bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados
Boletiacuten sobre los moacutedulos de conexioacuten de los arrancadores suaves 150 SMC-3 (1-37A)SMC-Delta (1-32A) 41053-173-01 (1)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre los moacutedulos de conexioacuten al SMC-3
Boletiacuten sobre el arrancador suave 150 SMC-3 (3-37A) 41053-167-01 (5)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre la instalacioacuten y el ajuste del SMC-3
Boletiacuten sobre el releacute de sobrecarga 193 E1 Plus 41053-358-01 (3)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre la instalacioacuten y el ajuste de la sobrecarga
Disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motorprotectores de circuitos de motor 21-301-951-01
Proporciona instrucciones para instalar el MPCB y el MCP
Bloque modular para componentes conectados de control de posicioacuten ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS003
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar y configurar los paraacutemetros del variador PowerFlex 40P con el programa preconfigurado RSLogix 500 que controla su sistema base incluye sugerencias de aplicacioacuten asiacute como informacioacuten para implementar las funciones de copia de seguridad y restauracioacuten de paraacutemetros del variador
MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publicacioacuten 1763-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo usar el controlador programable MicroLogix 1100
MicroLogix 1400 User Manual publicacioacuten 1766-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar el controlador programable MicroLogix 1400
PanelView Component Quick Start Manual publicacioacuten 2711C-QS001A
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar el PanelView Component
Terminales HMI PanelView Component Manual del usuario publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar los terminales HMI del PanelView Component
PowerFlex 4M Manual del usuario publicacioacuten 22F-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 4M y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 4 User Manual publicacioacuten 22A-UM001 Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 4 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 40 User Manual publicacioacuten 22B-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 40P User Manual publicacioacuten 22D-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 400 User Manual publicacioacuten 22C-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
httpwwwabcomdrivesdriveexplorer Proporciona acceso al software DriveExplorerLite
httpwwwabcom Proporciona acceso al sitio web de Allen-Bradley
httprockwellautomationcomknowledgebase Proporciona acceso al autoservicio de asistencia teacutecnica
httpwwwrockwellautomationcomcomponentsconnected
Proporciona acceso al sitio web de componentes conectados
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 9
Notas
10 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 1
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo contiene instrucciones para configurar el variador PowerFlex 4M y el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
En el variador PowerFlex 4M usted configuraraacute dos paraacutemetros Eacutestos son los paraacutemetros baacutesicos que se deben modificar con respecto a los ajustes predeterminados en faacutebrica para que los controladores MicroLogix reciban correctamente la retroalimentacioacuten necesaria En su aplicacioacuten de maacutequina tal vez haya otros paraacutemetros de variador que deban ser ajustados Consulte la documentacioacuten de su variador para obtener informacioacuten sobre otros paraacutemetros del mismo
Asimismo usted ajustaraacute los microinterruptores del controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 que se requieren para enviar la retroalimentacioacuten discreta apropiada al controlador MicroLogix
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y compruebe que haya seguido las recomendaciones sobre disentildeo e instalacioacuten de hardware asiacute como las de instalacioacuten de software
bull Conecte su variador a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
11Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 11
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Elementos necesarios
bull CD Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Uno o maacutes de estos variadores o arrancadoresndash Variador PowerFlex clase 4 (en este documento se utiliza el variador PowerFlex 4M)
bull Los variadores PowerFlex 4M 4 40 y 400 tienen un teclado y una pantalla incorporados para modificar los paraacutemetros
bull En el caso del variador PowerFlex 40P para modificar los paraacutemetros necesita
- Una interface de mano nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 22-HIM-A3o bien
- El software DriveExplorer instalado en la computadora personal y una interface USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1203-USB
ndash Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBRndash Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso variacutea de acuerdo al motor
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para configurar los paraacutemetros en los variadores y ajustar los microinterruptores en el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
Inicio
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M paacutegina 13
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
12 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M
Los valores predeterminados en faacutebrica para los distintos paraacutemetros permiten controlar el variador desde el teclado integrado No es necesario realizar ninguna programacioacuten para iniciar parar cambiar la direccioacuten o controlar la velocidad directamente desde el teclado integrado
No obstante para este bloque modular usted estableceraacute el paraacutemetro P106 [Start Source] para control de 2 conductores En el ejemplo correspondiente a este bloque modular el variador PF 4M se utiliza en modo de control SRC de 2 conductores (surtidor interno) sin inversioacuten SRC es el ajuste predeterminado para los variadores nuevos Si su variador ya ha sido utilizado anteriormente aseguacuterese de que el interruptor SNKSRC (SinkSource) situado bajo la cubierta frontal del variador PF 4M esteacute ajustado en SRC Para otros requerimientos especiacuteficos no contemplados en este ejemplo consulte el manual de usuario del variador PF 4M
Ademaacutes usted modificaraacute el paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Sel] para visualizar lsquoMotorRunningrsquo ya que este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten vea Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores paacutegina 30
Siga este procedimiento para cambiar los paraacutemetros P106 [Start Source] y t221 [Relay Out Sel] por medio del teclado PowerFlex 4M que se describe a continuacioacuten
Teclado del PowerFlex 4M
Tecla Nombre de la tecla
Descripcioacuten
Escapebull Retroceder un paso en el modo de programacioacuten
bull Cancelar el cambio de un valor de paraacutemetro y salir del modo de programacioacuten
Selectbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Seleccionar un diacutegito al visualizar un valor de paraacutemetro
Flecha hacia arriba
bull Desplazarse por los grupos y paraacutemetros
bull Aumentar y disminuir el valor de un diacutegito parpadeanteFlecha hacia abajo
Enterbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Guardar un cambio en el valor de un paraacutemetro
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 13
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
1 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
2 Presione Sel hasta que parpadee el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo
3 Presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
4 Presione Enter
La lsquoP deja de parpadear mientras la tecla numeacuterica del extremo derecho parpadea
Por defecto se visualiza el primer paraacutemetro lsquoPrsquo P101 Si presiona la flecha hacia arriba aumenta el valor de los paraacutemetros lsquoPrsquo si presiona la flecha hacia abajo disminuye dicho valor
5 Presione la flecha hacia arriba cinco veces para visualizar P106
Se visualiza el valor actual del paraacutemetro P106 que en este caso es lsquo0rsquo
6 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo0rsquo parpadea
7 Presione dos veces la flecha hacia arriba para ajustar el valor a lsquo2rsquo
8 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado
El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
9 Presione Esc
P106 se debe visualizar con el valor 6 parpadeando
10 Presione Esc hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
11 Presione la flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo para desplazarse por el menuacute de grupo hasta llegar a la lsquotrsquo
12 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo1rsquo parpadea
Detenga el variador antes de cambiar el paraacutemetro P106
14 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
13 Presione y mantenga presionada la flecha hacia arriba hasta que llegue al valor lsquo221rsquo
Si se pasa presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta regresar al valor lsquo221rsquo
14 Presione dos veces Enter para hacer que el valor lsquo0rsquo parpadee
15 Presione la flecha hacia arriba para desplazarse hasta el valor lsquo2rsquo
16 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
17 Presione Esc
Ahora el paraacutemetro t221 se debe visualizar con el lsquo1rsquo parpadeando
18 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
19 Desconecte la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador hasta que la pantalla quede en blanco y luego vuelva a conectar la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
Ahora su variador estaacute configurado para ser controlado mediante botones y comandos de comunicacioacuten iniciados desde el controlador MicroLogix
Al igual que sucede con todos los bloques modulares eacutestos son ejemplos de coacutemo recuperar informacioacuten de un producto de forma discreta Es posible cambiar el paraacutemetro t221 u otros ajustes de los arrancadores y variadores conforme a los requisitos de su aplicacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 15
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
El controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 se debe establecer para el contactor de aislamiento y para los valores establecidos para el motor A continuacioacuten aparecen los ajustes de microinterruptor utilizados por el controlador SMC-3 y los pasos necesarios para modificarlos
SUGERENCIA El 140M MPCB especificado en la lista de materiales para este bloque modular tiene un disparo de clase 10 No obstante si en el controlador SMC-3 desea utilizar los ajustes de clase de disparo por sobrecarga puede cambiar el 140M MPCB por el 140M MCP
16 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
1 Utilizando el siguiente cuadro estableza los ajustes de microinterruptor de forma que satisfagan las necesidades de arranque de su motor
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 17
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
2 Aseguacuterese de que el microinterruptor 14 tenga el ajuste Normal (apagado)
De ese modo se introduce el contactor de aislamiento cuando el SMC-3 ha recibido la sentildeal de entrada El microinterruptor 14 tambieacuten cierra el contacto auxiliar NA montado lateralmente cuando el arrancador llega a la velocidad deseada El cierre de este contacto auxiliar enviacutea la sentildeal de vuelta al controlador MicroLogix
3 Si cambia a un MCP ajuste los microinterruptores 11 y 12 a la clase apropiada de disparo por sobrecarga
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
IMPORTANTE El arrancador 103T utiliza un 140M MCP (protector de circuitos de motor) que a su vez emplea una sobrecarga separada (E1 Plus) Usted debe ajustar esta sobrecarga conforme a las necesidades de su sistema
El arrancador 190E el arrancador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M deben tener el cuadrante de sobrecarga ajustado a 140M MPCB (disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motor)
18 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 2
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo explica coacutemo confirmar que la comunicacioacuten se estaacute desarrollando del modo deseado entre el controlador MicroLogix y los arrancadores discretos individuales asiacute como entre el controlador MicroLogix y el terminal PanelView Component Para arrancar y parar por medio del terminal PVc el interruptor HOA externo debe estar en la en posicioacuten Auto En la posicioacuten Hand o sea modo manual el terminal PVc puede leer el estado de los arrancadores y de los variadores pero no puede arrancar o parar
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y aseguacuterese de haber completado todos los pasos que aparecen en el capiacutetulo 3 de dicho documento
bull Verifique que hayan completado todos los pasos descritos en el Capiacutetulo 1 de este documento
bull Verifique que todos los dispositivos hayan sido conectados seguacuten el diagrama de cableado CAD Simple Motor Control contenido en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Compruebe que el controlador MicroLogix el variador PowerFlex y el terminal PVc esteacuten conectados a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
19Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 19
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Elementos necesarios
bull CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Computadora personal con el explorador web Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox
bull Terminal PanelView Component
bull Uno o maacutes de los siguientes variadores o arrancadores
bull Variador PowerFlex 4M
bull Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBR
bull Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE
bull Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso puede variar de acuerdo al motor
bull Controlador MicroLogix 1100 oacute 1400
bull Cable en serie nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1761-CBL-PM02
bull Cable USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 2711C-CBL-UU02 o comparable
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para verificar que existe comunicacioacuten entre sus dispositivos y para probar el sistema
Inicio
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
paacutegina 21
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador
MicroLogix paacutegina 22
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
paacutegina 25
20 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
Usted puede obtener acceso al entorno de disentildeo PanelView Explorer a traveacutes de un explorador web Para ello debe conectar su computadora al terminal PVc mediante una conexioacuten USB Antes de conectar su computadora al puerto USB del terminal PVc primero debe instalar el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device en una computadora cuyo sistema operativo sea Windows XP o Windows Vista Despueacutes de instalar el driver puede conectar el terminal PVc a su computadora Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el driver consulte el manual de usuario Terminales HMI PanelView Component publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Conexiones USB del terminal PVc
Todos los terminales PanelView Component permiten la conexioacuten mediante puerto USB y necesitan una computadora que tenga el sistema operativo Windows XP o Windows Vista ademaacutes de tener instalado el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device El driver no se puede instalar en una computadora con el sistema operativo Windows 2000
1 Conecte un extremo de un cable USB al puerto de dispositivos mini-USB de su terminal PVc
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable USB a un puerto USB de su computadora personal
3 Encienda el terminal PVc y la computadora personal
Ventana de inicio de PanelView Explorer
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 21
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Recursos adicionales
Recurso Descripcioacuten
Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo seleccionar productos y coacutemo obtener acceso a informacioacuten sobre el panel y el cableado
CD Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
Proporciona archivos para los bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados
Boletiacuten sobre los moacutedulos de conexioacuten de los arrancadores suaves 150 SMC-3 (1-37A)SMC-Delta (1-32A) 41053-173-01 (1)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre los moacutedulos de conexioacuten al SMC-3
Boletiacuten sobre el arrancador suave 150 SMC-3 (3-37A) 41053-167-01 (5)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre la instalacioacuten y el ajuste del SMC-3
Boletiacuten sobre el releacute de sobrecarga 193 E1 Plus 41053-358-01 (3)
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre la instalacioacuten y el ajuste de la sobrecarga
Disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motorprotectores de circuitos de motor 21-301-951-01
Proporciona instrucciones para instalar el MPCB y el MCP
Bloque modular para componentes conectados de control de posicioacuten ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS003
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar y configurar los paraacutemetros del variador PowerFlex 40P con el programa preconfigurado RSLogix 500 que controla su sistema base incluye sugerencias de aplicacioacuten asiacute como informacioacuten para implementar las funciones de copia de seguridad y restauracioacuten de paraacutemetros del variador
MicroLogix 1100 Programmable Controllers User Manual publicacioacuten 1763-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo usar el controlador programable MicroLogix 1100
MicroLogix 1400 User Manual publicacioacuten 1766-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar el controlador programable MicroLogix 1400
PanelView Component Quick Start Manual publicacioacuten 2711C-QS001A
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar el PanelView Component
Terminales HMI PanelView Component Manual del usuario publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo utilizar los terminales HMI del PanelView Component
PowerFlex 4M Manual del usuario publicacioacuten 22F-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 4M y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 4 User Manual publicacioacuten 22A-UM001 Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 4 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 40 User Manual publicacioacuten 22B-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 40P User Manual publicacioacuten 22D-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
PowerFlex 400 User Manual publicacioacuten 22C-UM001
Proporciona informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el variador de frecuencia ajustable de CA PowerFlex 40 y coacutemo configurar su cableado y sus paraacutemetros
httpwwwabcomdrivesdriveexplorer Proporciona acceso al software DriveExplorerLite
httpwwwabcom Proporciona acceso al sitio web de Allen-Bradley
httprockwellautomationcomknowledgebase Proporciona acceso al autoservicio de asistencia teacutecnica
httpwwwrockwellautomationcomcomponentsconnected
Proporciona acceso al sitio web de componentes conectados
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 9
Notas
10 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 1
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo contiene instrucciones para configurar el variador PowerFlex 4M y el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
En el variador PowerFlex 4M usted configuraraacute dos paraacutemetros Eacutestos son los paraacutemetros baacutesicos que se deben modificar con respecto a los ajustes predeterminados en faacutebrica para que los controladores MicroLogix reciban correctamente la retroalimentacioacuten necesaria En su aplicacioacuten de maacutequina tal vez haya otros paraacutemetros de variador que deban ser ajustados Consulte la documentacioacuten de su variador para obtener informacioacuten sobre otros paraacutemetros del mismo
Asimismo usted ajustaraacute los microinterruptores del controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 que se requieren para enviar la retroalimentacioacuten discreta apropiada al controlador MicroLogix
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y compruebe que haya seguido las recomendaciones sobre disentildeo e instalacioacuten de hardware asiacute como las de instalacioacuten de software
bull Conecte su variador a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
11Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 11
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Elementos necesarios
bull CD Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Uno o maacutes de estos variadores o arrancadoresndash Variador PowerFlex clase 4 (en este documento se utiliza el variador PowerFlex 4M)
bull Los variadores PowerFlex 4M 4 40 y 400 tienen un teclado y una pantalla incorporados para modificar los paraacutemetros
bull En el caso del variador PowerFlex 40P para modificar los paraacutemetros necesita
- Una interface de mano nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 22-HIM-A3o bien
- El software DriveExplorer instalado en la computadora personal y una interface USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1203-USB
ndash Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBRndash Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso variacutea de acuerdo al motor
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para configurar los paraacutemetros en los variadores y ajustar los microinterruptores en el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
Inicio
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M paacutegina 13
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
12 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M
Los valores predeterminados en faacutebrica para los distintos paraacutemetros permiten controlar el variador desde el teclado integrado No es necesario realizar ninguna programacioacuten para iniciar parar cambiar la direccioacuten o controlar la velocidad directamente desde el teclado integrado
No obstante para este bloque modular usted estableceraacute el paraacutemetro P106 [Start Source] para control de 2 conductores En el ejemplo correspondiente a este bloque modular el variador PF 4M se utiliza en modo de control SRC de 2 conductores (surtidor interno) sin inversioacuten SRC es el ajuste predeterminado para los variadores nuevos Si su variador ya ha sido utilizado anteriormente aseguacuterese de que el interruptor SNKSRC (SinkSource) situado bajo la cubierta frontal del variador PF 4M esteacute ajustado en SRC Para otros requerimientos especiacuteficos no contemplados en este ejemplo consulte el manual de usuario del variador PF 4M
Ademaacutes usted modificaraacute el paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Sel] para visualizar lsquoMotorRunningrsquo ya que este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten vea Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores paacutegina 30
Siga este procedimiento para cambiar los paraacutemetros P106 [Start Source] y t221 [Relay Out Sel] por medio del teclado PowerFlex 4M que se describe a continuacioacuten
Teclado del PowerFlex 4M
Tecla Nombre de la tecla
Descripcioacuten
Escapebull Retroceder un paso en el modo de programacioacuten
bull Cancelar el cambio de un valor de paraacutemetro y salir del modo de programacioacuten
Selectbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Seleccionar un diacutegito al visualizar un valor de paraacutemetro
Flecha hacia arriba
bull Desplazarse por los grupos y paraacutemetros
bull Aumentar y disminuir el valor de un diacutegito parpadeanteFlecha hacia abajo
Enterbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Guardar un cambio en el valor de un paraacutemetro
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 13
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
1 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
2 Presione Sel hasta que parpadee el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo
3 Presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
4 Presione Enter
La lsquoP deja de parpadear mientras la tecla numeacuterica del extremo derecho parpadea
Por defecto se visualiza el primer paraacutemetro lsquoPrsquo P101 Si presiona la flecha hacia arriba aumenta el valor de los paraacutemetros lsquoPrsquo si presiona la flecha hacia abajo disminuye dicho valor
5 Presione la flecha hacia arriba cinco veces para visualizar P106
Se visualiza el valor actual del paraacutemetro P106 que en este caso es lsquo0rsquo
6 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo0rsquo parpadea
7 Presione dos veces la flecha hacia arriba para ajustar el valor a lsquo2rsquo
8 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado
El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
9 Presione Esc
P106 se debe visualizar con el valor 6 parpadeando
10 Presione Esc hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
11 Presione la flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo para desplazarse por el menuacute de grupo hasta llegar a la lsquotrsquo
12 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo1rsquo parpadea
Detenga el variador antes de cambiar el paraacutemetro P106
14 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
13 Presione y mantenga presionada la flecha hacia arriba hasta que llegue al valor lsquo221rsquo
Si se pasa presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta regresar al valor lsquo221rsquo
14 Presione dos veces Enter para hacer que el valor lsquo0rsquo parpadee
15 Presione la flecha hacia arriba para desplazarse hasta el valor lsquo2rsquo
16 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
17 Presione Esc
Ahora el paraacutemetro t221 se debe visualizar con el lsquo1rsquo parpadeando
18 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
19 Desconecte la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador hasta que la pantalla quede en blanco y luego vuelva a conectar la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
Ahora su variador estaacute configurado para ser controlado mediante botones y comandos de comunicacioacuten iniciados desde el controlador MicroLogix
Al igual que sucede con todos los bloques modulares eacutestos son ejemplos de coacutemo recuperar informacioacuten de un producto de forma discreta Es posible cambiar el paraacutemetro t221 u otros ajustes de los arrancadores y variadores conforme a los requisitos de su aplicacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 15
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
El controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 se debe establecer para el contactor de aislamiento y para los valores establecidos para el motor A continuacioacuten aparecen los ajustes de microinterruptor utilizados por el controlador SMC-3 y los pasos necesarios para modificarlos
SUGERENCIA El 140M MPCB especificado en la lista de materiales para este bloque modular tiene un disparo de clase 10 No obstante si en el controlador SMC-3 desea utilizar los ajustes de clase de disparo por sobrecarga puede cambiar el 140M MPCB por el 140M MCP
16 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
1 Utilizando el siguiente cuadro estableza los ajustes de microinterruptor de forma que satisfagan las necesidades de arranque de su motor
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 17
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
2 Aseguacuterese de que el microinterruptor 14 tenga el ajuste Normal (apagado)
De ese modo se introduce el contactor de aislamiento cuando el SMC-3 ha recibido la sentildeal de entrada El microinterruptor 14 tambieacuten cierra el contacto auxiliar NA montado lateralmente cuando el arrancador llega a la velocidad deseada El cierre de este contacto auxiliar enviacutea la sentildeal de vuelta al controlador MicroLogix
3 Si cambia a un MCP ajuste los microinterruptores 11 y 12 a la clase apropiada de disparo por sobrecarga
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
IMPORTANTE El arrancador 103T utiliza un 140M MCP (protector de circuitos de motor) que a su vez emplea una sobrecarga separada (E1 Plus) Usted debe ajustar esta sobrecarga conforme a las necesidades de su sistema
El arrancador 190E el arrancador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M deben tener el cuadrante de sobrecarga ajustado a 140M MPCB (disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motor)
18 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 2
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo explica coacutemo confirmar que la comunicacioacuten se estaacute desarrollando del modo deseado entre el controlador MicroLogix y los arrancadores discretos individuales asiacute como entre el controlador MicroLogix y el terminal PanelView Component Para arrancar y parar por medio del terminal PVc el interruptor HOA externo debe estar en la en posicioacuten Auto En la posicioacuten Hand o sea modo manual el terminal PVc puede leer el estado de los arrancadores y de los variadores pero no puede arrancar o parar
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y aseguacuterese de haber completado todos los pasos que aparecen en el capiacutetulo 3 de dicho documento
bull Verifique que hayan completado todos los pasos descritos en el Capiacutetulo 1 de este documento
bull Verifique que todos los dispositivos hayan sido conectados seguacuten el diagrama de cableado CAD Simple Motor Control contenido en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Compruebe que el controlador MicroLogix el variador PowerFlex y el terminal PVc esteacuten conectados a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
19Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 19
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Elementos necesarios
bull CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Computadora personal con el explorador web Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox
bull Terminal PanelView Component
bull Uno o maacutes de los siguientes variadores o arrancadores
bull Variador PowerFlex 4M
bull Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBR
bull Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE
bull Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso puede variar de acuerdo al motor
bull Controlador MicroLogix 1100 oacute 1400
bull Cable en serie nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1761-CBL-PM02
bull Cable USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 2711C-CBL-UU02 o comparable
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para verificar que existe comunicacioacuten entre sus dispositivos y para probar el sistema
Inicio
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
paacutegina 21
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador
MicroLogix paacutegina 22
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
paacutegina 25
20 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
Usted puede obtener acceso al entorno de disentildeo PanelView Explorer a traveacutes de un explorador web Para ello debe conectar su computadora al terminal PVc mediante una conexioacuten USB Antes de conectar su computadora al puerto USB del terminal PVc primero debe instalar el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device en una computadora cuyo sistema operativo sea Windows XP o Windows Vista Despueacutes de instalar el driver puede conectar el terminal PVc a su computadora Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el driver consulte el manual de usuario Terminales HMI PanelView Component publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Conexiones USB del terminal PVc
Todos los terminales PanelView Component permiten la conexioacuten mediante puerto USB y necesitan una computadora que tenga el sistema operativo Windows XP o Windows Vista ademaacutes de tener instalado el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device El driver no se puede instalar en una computadora con el sistema operativo Windows 2000
1 Conecte un extremo de un cable USB al puerto de dispositivos mini-USB de su terminal PVc
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable USB a un puerto USB de su computadora personal
3 Encienda el terminal PVc y la computadora personal
Ventana de inicio de PanelView Explorer
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 21
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB ltFEFF005500740069006c0069007a006500200065007300740061007300200063006f006e00660069006700750072006100e700f5006500730020007000610072006100200063007200690061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200063006f006d00200075006d0061002000760069007300750061006c0069007a006100e700e3006f0020006500200069006d0070007200650073007300e3006f00200061006400650071007500610064006100730020007000610072006100200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f007300200063006f006d0065007200630069006100690073002e0020004f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200070006f00640065006d0020007300650072002000610062006500720074006f007300200063006f006d0020006f0020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006500200070006f00730074006500720069006f0072002egt DAN ltFEFF004200720075006700200064006900730073006500200069006e0064007300740069006c006c0069006e006700650072002000740069006c0020006100740020006f0070007200650074007400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002c0020006400650072002000650072002000650067006e006500640065002000740069006c0020007000e5006c006900640065006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f00670020007500640073006b007200690076006e0069006e006700200061006600200066006f0072007200650074006e0069006e006700730064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50062006e006500730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0067002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00670020006e0079006500720065002egt NLD ltFEFF004700650062007200750069006b002000640065007a006500200069006e007300740065006c006c0069006e00670065006e0020006f006d0020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007400650020006d0061006b0065006e00200064006900650020006700650073006300680069006b00740020007a0069006a006e0020006f006d0020007a0061006b0065006c0069006a006b006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e00200062006500740072006f0075007700620061006100720020007700650065007200200074006500200067006500760065006e00200065006e0020006100660020007400650020006400720075006b006b0065006e002e0020004400650020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0075006e006e0065006e00200077006f007200640065006e002000670065006f00700065006e00640020006d006500740020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006e002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006e00200068006f006700650072002egt ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Notas
10 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 1
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo contiene instrucciones para configurar el variador PowerFlex 4M y el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
En el variador PowerFlex 4M usted configuraraacute dos paraacutemetros Eacutestos son los paraacutemetros baacutesicos que se deben modificar con respecto a los ajustes predeterminados en faacutebrica para que los controladores MicroLogix reciban correctamente la retroalimentacioacuten necesaria En su aplicacioacuten de maacutequina tal vez haya otros paraacutemetros de variador que deban ser ajustados Consulte la documentacioacuten de su variador para obtener informacioacuten sobre otros paraacutemetros del mismo
Asimismo usted ajustaraacute los microinterruptores del controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 que se requieren para enviar la retroalimentacioacuten discreta apropiada al controlador MicroLogix
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y compruebe que haya seguido las recomendaciones sobre disentildeo e instalacioacuten de hardware asiacute como las de instalacioacuten de software
bull Conecte su variador a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
11Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 11
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Elementos necesarios
bull CD Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Uno o maacutes de estos variadores o arrancadoresndash Variador PowerFlex clase 4 (en este documento se utiliza el variador PowerFlex 4M)
bull Los variadores PowerFlex 4M 4 40 y 400 tienen un teclado y una pantalla incorporados para modificar los paraacutemetros
bull En el caso del variador PowerFlex 40P para modificar los paraacutemetros necesita
- Una interface de mano nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 22-HIM-A3o bien
- El software DriveExplorer instalado en la computadora personal y una interface USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1203-USB
ndash Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBRndash Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso variacutea de acuerdo al motor
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para configurar los paraacutemetros en los variadores y ajustar los microinterruptores en el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
Inicio
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M paacutegina 13
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
12 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M
Los valores predeterminados en faacutebrica para los distintos paraacutemetros permiten controlar el variador desde el teclado integrado No es necesario realizar ninguna programacioacuten para iniciar parar cambiar la direccioacuten o controlar la velocidad directamente desde el teclado integrado
No obstante para este bloque modular usted estableceraacute el paraacutemetro P106 [Start Source] para control de 2 conductores En el ejemplo correspondiente a este bloque modular el variador PF 4M se utiliza en modo de control SRC de 2 conductores (surtidor interno) sin inversioacuten SRC es el ajuste predeterminado para los variadores nuevos Si su variador ya ha sido utilizado anteriormente aseguacuterese de que el interruptor SNKSRC (SinkSource) situado bajo la cubierta frontal del variador PF 4M esteacute ajustado en SRC Para otros requerimientos especiacuteficos no contemplados en este ejemplo consulte el manual de usuario del variador PF 4M
Ademaacutes usted modificaraacute el paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Sel] para visualizar lsquoMotorRunningrsquo ya que este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten vea Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores paacutegina 30
Siga este procedimiento para cambiar los paraacutemetros P106 [Start Source] y t221 [Relay Out Sel] por medio del teclado PowerFlex 4M que se describe a continuacioacuten
Teclado del PowerFlex 4M
Tecla Nombre de la tecla
Descripcioacuten
Escapebull Retroceder un paso en el modo de programacioacuten
bull Cancelar el cambio de un valor de paraacutemetro y salir del modo de programacioacuten
Selectbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Seleccionar un diacutegito al visualizar un valor de paraacutemetro
Flecha hacia arriba
bull Desplazarse por los grupos y paraacutemetros
bull Aumentar y disminuir el valor de un diacutegito parpadeanteFlecha hacia abajo
Enterbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Guardar un cambio en el valor de un paraacutemetro
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 13
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
1 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
2 Presione Sel hasta que parpadee el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo
3 Presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
4 Presione Enter
La lsquoP deja de parpadear mientras la tecla numeacuterica del extremo derecho parpadea
Por defecto se visualiza el primer paraacutemetro lsquoPrsquo P101 Si presiona la flecha hacia arriba aumenta el valor de los paraacutemetros lsquoPrsquo si presiona la flecha hacia abajo disminuye dicho valor
5 Presione la flecha hacia arriba cinco veces para visualizar P106
Se visualiza el valor actual del paraacutemetro P106 que en este caso es lsquo0rsquo
6 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo0rsquo parpadea
7 Presione dos veces la flecha hacia arriba para ajustar el valor a lsquo2rsquo
8 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado
El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
9 Presione Esc
P106 se debe visualizar con el valor 6 parpadeando
10 Presione Esc hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
11 Presione la flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo para desplazarse por el menuacute de grupo hasta llegar a la lsquotrsquo
12 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo1rsquo parpadea
Detenga el variador antes de cambiar el paraacutemetro P106
14 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
13 Presione y mantenga presionada la flecha hacia arriba hasta que llegue al valor lsquo221rsquo
Si se pasa presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta regresar al valor lsquo221rsquo
14 Presione dos veces Enter para hacer que el valor lsquo0rsquo parpadee
15 Presione la flecha hacia arriba para desplazarse hasta el valor lsquo2rsquo
16 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
17 Presione Esc
Ahora el paraacutemetro t221 se debe visualizar con el lsquo1rsquo parpadeando
18 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
19 Desconecte la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador hasta que la pantalla quede en blanco y luego vuelva a conectar la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
Ahora su variador estaacute configurado para ser controlado mediante botones y comandos de comunicacioacuten iniciados desde el controlador MicroLogix
Al igual que sucede con todos los bloques modulares eacutestos son ejemplos de coacutemo recuperar informacioacuten de un producto de forma discreta Es posible cambiar el paraacutemetro t221 u otros ajustes de los arrancadores y variadores conforme a los requisitos de su aplicacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 15
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
El controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 se debe establecer para el contactor de aislamiento y para los valores establecidos para el motor A continuacioacuten aparecen los ajustes de microinterruptor utilizados por el controlador SMC-3 y los pasos necesarios para modificarlos
SUGERENCIA El 140M MPCB especificado en la lista de materiales para este bloque modular tiene un disparo de clase 10 No obstante si en el controlador SMC-3 desea utilizar los ajustes de clase de disparo por sobrecarga puede cambiar el 140M MPCB por el 140M MCP
16 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
1 Utilizando el siguiente cuadro estableza los ajustes de microinterruptor de forma que satisfagan las necesidades de arranque de su motor
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 17
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
2 Aseguacuterese de que el microinterruptor 14 tenga el ajuste Normal (apagado)
De ese modo se introduce el contactor de aislamiento cuando el SMC-3 ha recibido la sentildeal de entrada El microinterruptor 14 tambieacuten cierra el contacto auxiliar NA montado lateralmente cuando el arrancador llega a la velocidad deseada El cierre de este contacto auxiliar enviacutea la sentildeal de vuelta al controlador MicroLogix
3 Si cambia a un MCP ajuste los microinterruptores 11 y 12 a la clase apropiada de disparo por sobrecarga
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
IMPORTANTE El arrancador 103T utiliza un 140M MCP (protector de circuitos de motor) que a su vez emplea una sobrecarga separada (E1 Plus) Usted debe ajustar esta sobrecarga conforme a las necesidades de su sistema
El arrancador 190E el arrancador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M deben tener el cuadrante de sobrecarga ajustado a 140M MPCB (disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motor)
18 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 2
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo explica coacutemo confirmar que la comunicacioacuten se estaacute desarrollando del modo deseado entre el controlador MicroLogix y los arrancadores discretos individuales asiacute como entre el controlador MicroLogix y el terminal PanelView Component Para arrancar y parar por medio del terminal PVc el interruptor HOA externo debe estar en la en posicioacuten Auto En la posicioacuten Hand o sea modo manual el terminal PVc puede leer el estado de los arrancadores y de los variadores pero no puede arrancar o parar
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y aseguacuterese de haber completado todos los pasos que aparecen en el capiacutetulo 3 de dicho documento
bull Verifique que hayan completado todos los pasos descritos en el Capiacutetulo 1 de este documento
bull Verifique que todos los dispositivos hayan sido conectados seguacuten el diagrama de cableado CAD Simple Motor Control contenido en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Compruebe que el controlador MicroLogix el variador PowerFlex y el terminal PVc esteacuten conectados a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
19Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 19
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Elementos necesarios
bull CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Computadora personal con el explorador web Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox
bull Terminal PanelView Component
bull Uno o maacutes de los siguientes variadores o arrancadores
bull Variador PowerFlex 4M
bull Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBR
bull Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE
bull Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso puede variar de acuerdo al motor
bull Controlador MicroLogix 1100 oacute 1400
bull Cable en serie nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1761-CBL-PM02
bull Cable USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 2711C-CBL-UU02 o comparable
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para verificar que existe comunicacioacuten entre sus dispositivos y para probar el sistema
Inicio
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
paacutegina 21
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador
MicroLogix paacutegina 22
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
paacutegina 25
20 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
Usted puede obtener acceso al entorno de disentildeo PanelView Explorer a traveacutes de un explorador web Para ello debe conectar su computadora al terminal PVc mediante una conexioacuten USB Antes de conectar su computadora al puerto USB del terminal PVc primero debe instalar el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device en una computadora cuyo sistema operativo sea Windows XP o Windows Vista Despueacutes de instalar el driver puede conectar el terminal PVc a su computadora Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el driver consulte el manual de usuario Terminales HMI PanelView Component publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Conexiones USB del terminal PVc
Todos los terminales PanelView Component permiten la conexioacuten mediante puerto USB y necesitan una computadora que tenga el sistema operativo Windows XP o Windows Vista ademaacutes de tener instalado el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device El driver no se puede instalar en una computadora con el sistema operativo Windows 2000
1 Conecte un extremo de un cable USB al puerto de dispositivos mini-USB de su terminal PVc
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable USB a un puerto USB de su computadora personal
3 Encienda el terminal PVc y la computadora personal
Ventana de inicio de PanelView Explorer
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 21
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Capiacutetulo 1
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo contiene instrucciones para configurar el variador PowerFlex 4M y el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
En el variador PowerFlex 4M usted configuraraacute dos paraacutemetros Eacutestos son los paraacutemetros baacutesicos que se deben modificar con respecto a los ajustes predeterminados en faacutebrica para que los controladores MicroLogix reciban correctamente la retroalimentacioacuten necesaria En su aplicacioacuten de maacutequina tal vez haya otros paraacutemetros de variador que deban ser ajustados Consulte la documentacioacuten de su variador para obtener informacioacuten sobre otros paraacutemetros del mismo
Asimismo usted ajustaraacute los microinterruptores del controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 que se requieren para enviar la retroalimentacioacuten discreta apropiada al controlador MicroLogix
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados ndash Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y compruebe que haya seguido las recomendaciones sobre disentildeo e instalacioacuten de hardware asiacute como las de instalacioacuten de software
bull Conecte su variador a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
11Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 11
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Elementos necesarios
bull CD Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Uno o maacutes de estos variadores o arrancadoresndash Variador PowerFlex clase 4 (en este documento se utiliza el variador PowerFlex 4M)
bull Los variadores PowerFlex 4M 4 40 y 400 tienen un teclado y una pantalla incorporados para modificar los paraacutemetros
bull En el caso del variador PowerFlex 40P para modificar los paraacutemetros necesita
- Una interface de mano nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 22-HIM-A3o bien
- El software DriveExplorer instalado en la computadora personal y una interface USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1203-USB
ndash Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBRndash Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso variacutea de acuerdo al motor
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para configurar los paraacutemetros en los variadores y ajustar los microinterruptores en el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
Inicio
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M paacutegina 13
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
12 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M
Los valores predeterminados en faacutebrica para los distintos paraacutemetros permiten controlar el variador desde el teclado integrado No es necesario realizar ninguna programacioacuten para iniciar parar cambiar la direccioacuten o controlar la velocidad directamente desde el teclado integrado
No obstante para este bloque modular usted estableceraacute el paraacutemetro P106 [Start Source] para control de 2 conductores En el ejemplo correspondiente a este bloque modular el variador PF 4M se utiliza en modo de control SRC de 2 conductores (surtidor interno) sin inversioacuten SRC es el ajuste predeterminado para los variadores nuevos Si su variador ya ha sido utilizado anteriormente aseguacuterese de que el interruptor SNKSRC (SinkSource) situado bajo la cubierta frontal del variador PF 4M esteacute ajustado en SRC Para otros requerimientos especiacuteficos no contemplados en este ejemplo consulte el manual de usuario del variador PF 4M
Ademaacutes usted modificaraacute el paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Sel] para visualizar lsquoMotorRunningrsquo ya que este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten vea Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores paacutegina 30
Siga este procedimiento para cambiar los paraacutemetros P106 [Start Source] y t221 [Relay Out Sel] por medio del teclado PowerFlex 4M que se describe a continuacioacuten
Teclado del PowerFlex 4M
Tecla Nombre de la tecla
Descripcioacuten
Escapebull Retroceder un paso en el modo de programacioacuten
bull Cancelar el cambio de un valor de paraacutemetro y salir del modo de programacioacuten
Selectbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Seleccionar un diacutegito al visualizar un valor de paraacutemetro
Flecha hacia arriba
bull Desplazarse por los grupos y paraacutemetros
bull Aumentar y disminuir el valor de un diacutegito parpadeanteFlecha hacia abajo
Enterbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Guardar un cambio en el valor de un paraacutemetro
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 13
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
1 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
2 Presione Sel hasta que parpadee el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo
3 Presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
4 Presione Enter
La lsquoP deja de parpadear mientras la tecla numeacuterica del extremo derecho parpadea
Por defecto se visualiza el primer paraacutemetro lsquoPrsquo P101 Si presiona la flecha hacia arriba aumenta el valor de los paraacutemetros lsquoPrsquo si presiona la flecha hacia abajo disminuye dicho valor
5 Presione la flecha hacia arriba cinco veces para visualizar P106
Se visualiza el valor actual del paraacutemetro P106 que en este caso es lsquo0rsquo
6 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo0rsquo parpadea
7 Presione dos veces la flecha hacia arriba para ajustar el valor a lsquo2rsquo
8 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado
El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
9 Presione Esc
P106 se debe visualizar con el valor 6 parpadeando
10 Presione Esc hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
11 Presione la flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo para desplazarse por el menuacute de grupo hasta llegar a la lsquotrsquo
12 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo1rsquo parpadea
Detenga el variador antes de cambiar el paraacutemetro P106
14 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
13 Presione y mantenga presionada la flecha hacia arriba hasta que llegue al valor lsquo221rsquo
Si se pasa presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta regresar al valor lsquo221rsquo
14 Presione dos veces Enter para hacer que el valor lsquo0rsquo parpadee
15 Presione la flecha hacia arriba para desplazarse hasta el valor lsquo2rsquo
16 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
17 Presione Esc
Ahora el paraacutemetro t221 se debe visualizar con el lsquo1rsquo parpadeando
18 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
19 Desconecte la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador hasta que la pantalla quede en blanco y luego vuelva a conectar la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
Ahora su variador estaacute configurado para ser controlado mediante botones y comandos de comunicacioacuten iniciados desde el controlador MicroLogix
Al igual que sucede con todos los bloques modulares eacutestos son ejemplos de coacutemo recuperar informacioacuten de un producto de forma discreta Es posible cambiar el paraacutemetro t221 u otros ajustes de los arrancadores y variadores conforme a los requisitos de su aplicacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 15
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
El controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 se debe establecer para el contactor de aislamiento y para los valores establecidos para el motor A continuacioacuten aparecen los ajustes de microinterruptor utilizados por el controlador SMC-3 y los pasos necesarios para modificarlos
SUGERENCIA El 140M MPCB especificado en la lista de materiales para este bloque modular tiene un disparo de clase 10 No obstante si en el controlador SMC-3 desea utilizar los ajustes de clase de disparo por sobrecarga puede cambiar el 140M MPCB por el 140M MCP
16 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
1 Utilizando el siguiente cuadro estableza los ajustes de microinterruptor de forma que satisfagan las necesidades de arranque de su motor
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 17
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
2 Aseguacuterese de que el microinterruptor 14 tenga el ajuste Normal (apagado)
De ese modo se introduce el contactor de aislamiento cuando el SMC-3 ha recibido la sentildeal de entrada El microinterruptor 14 tambieacuten cierra el contacto auxiliar NA montado lateralmente cuando el arrancador llega a la velocidad deseada El cierre de este contacto auxiliar enviacutea la sentildeal de vuelta al controlador MicroLogix
3 Si cambia a un MCP ajuste los microinterruptores 11 y 12 a la clase apropiada de disparo por sobrecarga
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
IMPORTANTE El arrancador 103T utiliza un 140M MCP (protector de circuitos de motor) que a su vez emplea una sobrecarga separada (E1 Plus) Usted debe ajustar esta sobrecarga conforme a las necesidades de su sistema
El arrancador 190E el arrancador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M deben tener el cuadrante de sobrecarga ajustado a 140M MPCB (disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motor)
18 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 2
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo explica coacutemo confirmar que la comunicacioacuten se estaacute desarrollando del modo deseado entre el controlador MicroLogix y los arrancadores discretos individuales asiacute como entre el controlador MicroLogix y el terminal PanelView Component Para arrancar y parar por medio del terminal PVc el interruptor HOA externo debe estar en la en posicioacuten Auto En la posicioacuten Hand o sea modo manual el terminal PVc puede leer el estado de los arrancadores y de los variadores pero no puede arrancar o parar
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y aseguacuterese de haber completado todos los pasos que aparecen en el capiacutetulo 3 de dicho documento
bull Verifique que hayan completado todos los pasos descritos en el Capiacutetulo 1 de este documento
bull Verifique que todos los dispositivos hayan sido conectados seguacuten el diagrama de cableado CAD Simple Motor Control contenido en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Compruebe que el controlador MicroLogix el variador PowerFlex y el terminal PVc esteacuten conectados a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
19Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 19
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Elementos necesarios
bull CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Computadora personal con el explorador web Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox
bull Terminal PanelView Component
bull Uno o maacutes de los siguientes variadores o arrancadores
bull Variador PowerFlex 4M
bull Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBR
bull Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE
bull Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso puede variar de acuerdo al motor
bull Controlador MicroLogix 1100 oacute 1400
bull Cable en serie nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1761-CBL-PM02
bull Cable USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 2711C-CBL-UU02 o comparable
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para verificar que existe comunicacioacuten entre sus dispositivos y para probar el sistema
Inicio
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
paacutegina 21
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador
MicroLogix paacutegina 22
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
paacutegina 25
20 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
Usted puede obtener acceso al entorno de disentildeo PanelView Explorer a traveacutes de un explorador web Para ello debe conectar su computadora al terminal PVc mediante una conexioacuten USB Antes de conectar su computadora al puerto USB del terminal PVc primero debe instalar el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device en una computadora cuyo sistema operativo sea Windows XP o Windows Vista Despueacutes de instalar el driver puede conectar el terminal PVc a su computadora Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el driver consulte el manual de usuario Terminales HMI PanelView Component publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Conexiones USB del terminal PVc
Todos los terminales PanelView Component permiten la conexioacuten mediante puerto USB y necesitan una computadora que tenga el sistema operativo Windows XP o Windows Vista ademaacutes de tener instalado el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device El driver no se puede instalar en una computadora con el sistema operativo Windows 2000
1 Conecte un extremo de un cable USB al puerto de dispositivos mini-USB de su terminal PVc
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable USB a un puerto USB de su computadora personal
3 Encienda el terminal PVc y la computadora personal
Ventana de inicio de PanelView Explorer
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 21
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Elementos necesarios
bull CD Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Uno o maacutes de estos variadores o arrancadoresndash Variador PowerFlex clase 4 (en este documento se utiliza el variador PowerFlex 4M)
bull Los variadores PowerFlex 4M 4 40 y 400 tienen un teclado y una pantalla incorporados para modificar los paraacutemetros
bull En el caso del variador PowerFlex 40P para modificar los paraacutemetros necesita
- Una interface de mano nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 22-HIM-A3o bien
- El software DriveExplorer instalado en la computadora personal y una interface USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1203-USB
ndash Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBRndash Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TEndash Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso variacutea de acuerdo al motor
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para configurar los paraacutemetros en los variadores y ajustar los microinterruptores en el controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3
Inicio
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M paacutegina 13
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
12 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M
Los valores predeterminados en faacutebrica para los distintos paraacutemetros permiten controlar el variador desde el teclado integrado No es necesario realizar ninguna programacioacuten para iniciar parar cambiar la direccioacuten o controlar la velocidad directamente desde el teclado integrado
No obstante para este bloque modular usted estableceraacute el paraacutemetro P106 [Start Source] para control de 2 conductores En el ejemplo correspondiente a este bloque modular el variador PF 4M se utiliza en modo de control SRC de 2 conductores (surtidor interno) sin inversioacuten SRC es el ajuste predeterminado para los variadores nuevos Si su variador ya ha sido utilizado anteriormente aseguacuterese de que el interruptor SNKSRC (SinkSource) situado bajo la cubierta frontal del variador PF 4M esteacute ajustado en SRC Para otros requerimientos especiacuteficos no contemplados en este ejemplo consulte el manual de usuario del variador PF 4M
Ademaacutes usted modificaraacute el paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Sel] para visualizar lsquoMotorRunningrsquo ya que este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten vea Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores paacutegina 30
Siga este procedimiento para cambiar los paraacutemetros P106 [Start Source] y t221 [Relay Out Sel] por medio del teclado PowerFlex 4M que se describe a continuacioacuten
Teclado del PowerFlex 4M
Tecla Nombre de la tecla
Descripcioacuten
Escapebull Retroceder un paso en el modo de programacioacuten
bull Cancelar el cambio de un valor de paraacutemetro y salir del modo de programacioacuten
Selectbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Seleccionar un diacutegito al visualizar un valor de paraacutemetro
Flecha hacia arriba
bull Desplazarse por los grupos y paraacutemetros
bull Aumentar y disminuir el valor de un diacutegito parpadeanteFlecha hacia abajo
Enterbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Guardar un cambio en el valor de un paraacutemetro
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 13
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
1 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
2 Presione Sel hasta que parpadee el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo
3 Presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
4 Presione Enter
La lsquoP deja de parpadear mientras la tecla numeacuterica del extremo derecho parpadea
Por defecto se visualiza el primer paraacutemetro lsquoPrsquo P101 Si presiona la flecha hacia arriba aumenta el valor de los paraacutemetros lsquoPrsquo si presiona la flecha hacia abajo disminuye dicho valor
5 Presione la flecha hacia arriba cinco veces para visualizar P106
Se visualiza el valor actual del paraacutemetro P106 que en este caso es lsquo0rsquo
6 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo0rsquo parpadea
7 Presione dos veces la flecha hacia arriba para ajustar el valor a lsquo2rsquo
8 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado
El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
9 Presione Esc
P106 se debe visualizar con el valor 6 parpadeando
10 Presione Esc hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
11 Presione la flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo para desplazarse por el menuacute de grupo hasta llegar a la lsquotrsquo
12 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo1rsquo parpadea
Detenga el variador antes de cambiar el paraacutemetro P106
14 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
13 Presione y mantenga presionada la flecha hacia arriba hasta que llegue al valor lsquo221rsquo
Si se pasa presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta regresar al valor lsquo221rsquo
14 Presione dos veces Enter para hacer que el valor lsquo0rsquo parpadee
15 Presione la flecha hacia arriba para desplazarse hasta el valor lsquo2rsquo
16 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
17 Presione Esc
Ahora el paraacutemetro t221 se debe visualizar con el lsquo1rsquo parpadeando
18 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
19 Desconecte la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador hasta que la pantalla quede en blanco y luego vuelva a conectar la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
Ahora su variador estaacute configurado para ser controlado mediante botones y comandos de comunicacioacuten iniciados desde el controlador MicroLogix
Al igual que sucede con todos los bloques modulares eacutestos son ejemplos de coacutemo recuperar informacioacuten de un producto de forma discreta Es posible cambiar el paraacutemetro t221 u otros ajustes de los arrancadores y variadores conforme a los requisitos de su aplicacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 15
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
El controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 se debe establecer para el contactor de aislamiento y para los valores establecidos para el motor A continuacioacuten aparecen los ajustes de microinterruptor utilizados por el controlador SMC-3 y los pasos necesarios para modificarlos
SUGERENCIA El 140M MPCB especificado en la lista de materiales para este bloque modular tiene un disparo de clase 10 No obstante si en el controlador SMC-3 desea utilizar los ajustes de clase de disparo por sobrecarga puede cambiar el 140M MPCB por el 140M MCP
16 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
1 Utilizando el siguiente cuadro estableza los ajustes de microinterruptor de forma que satisfagan las necesidades de arranque de su motor
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 17
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
2 Aseguacuterese de que el microinterruptor 14 tenga el ajuste Normal (apagado)
De ese modo se introduce el contactor de aislamiento cuando el SMC-3 ha recibido la sentildeal de entrada El microinterruptor 14 tambieacuten cierra el contacto auxiliar NA montado lateralmente cuando el arrancador llega a la velocidad deseada El cierre de este contacto auxiliar enviacutea la sentildeal de vuelta al controlador MicroLogix
3 Si cambia a un MCP ajuste los microinterruptores 11 y 12 a la clase apropiada de disparo por sobrecarga
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
IMPORTANTE El arrancador 103T utiliza un 140M MCP (protector de circuitos de motor) que a su vez emplea una sobrecarga separada (E1 Plus) Usted debe ajustar esta sobrecarga conforme a las necesidades de su sistema
El arrancador 190E el arrancador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M deben tener el cuadrante de sobrecarga ajustado a 140M MPCB (disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motor)
18 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 2
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo explica coacutemo confirmar que la comunicacioacuten se estaacute desarrollando del modo deseado entre el controlador MicroLogix y los arrancadores discretos individuales asiacute como entre el controlador MicroLogix y el terminal PanelView Component Para arrancar y parar por medio del terminal PVc el interruptor HOA externo debe estar en la en posicioacuten Auto En la posicioacuten Hand o sea modo manual el terminal PVc puede leer el estado de los arrancadores y de los variadores pero no puede arrancar o parar
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y aseguacuterese de haber completado todos los pasos que aparecen en el capiacutetulo 3 de dicho documento
bull Verifique que hayan completado todos los pasos descritos en el Capiacutetulo 1 de este documento
bull Verifique que todos los dispositivos hayan sido conectados seguacuten el diagrama de cableado CAD Simple Motor Control contenido en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Compruebe que el controlador MicroLogix el variador PowerFlex y el terminal PVc esteacuten conectados a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
19Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 19
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Elementos necesarios
bull CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Computadora personal con el explorador web Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox
bull Terminal PanelView Component
bull Uno o maacutes de los siguientes variadores o arrancadores
bull Variador PowerFlex 4M
bull Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBR
bull Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE
bull Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso puede variar de acuerdo al motor
bull Controlador MicroLogix 1100 oacute 1400
bull Cable en serie nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1761-CBL-PM02
bull Cable USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 2711C-CBL-UU02 o comparable
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para verificar que existe comunicacioacuten entre sus dispositivos y para probar el sistema
Inicio
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
paacutegina 21
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador
MicroLogix paacutegina 22
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
paacutegina 25
20 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
Usted puede obtener acceso al entorno de disentildeo PanelView Explorer a traveacutes de un explorador web Para ello debe conectar su computadora al terminal PVc mediante una conexioacuten USB Antes de conectar su computadora al puerto USB del terminal PVc primero debe instalar el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device en una computadora cuyo sistema operativo sea Windows XP o Windows Vista Despueacutes de instalar el driver puede conectar el terminal PVc a su computadora Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el driver consulte el manual de usuario Terminales HMI PanelView Component publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Conexiones USB del terminal PVc
Todos los terminales PanelView Component permiten la conexioacuten mediante puerto USB y necesitan una computadora que tenga el sistema operativo Windows XP o Windows Vista ademaacutes de tener instalado el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device El driver no se puede instalar en una computadora con el sistema operativo Windows 2000
1 Conecte un extremo de un cable USB al puerto de dispositivos mini-USB de su terminal PVc
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable USB a un puerto USB de su computadora personal
3 Encienda el terminal PVc y la computadora personal
Ventana de inicio de PanelView Explorer
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 21
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD ltFEFF004700650062007200750069006b002000640065007a006500200069006e007300740065006c006c0069006e00670065006e0020006f006d0020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007400650020006d0061006b0065006e00200064006900650020006700650073006300680069006b00740020007a0069006a006e0020006f006d0020007a0061006b0065006c0069006a006b006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e00200062006500740072006f0075007700620061006100720020007700650065007200200074006500200067006500760065006e00200065006e0020006100660020007400650020006400720075006b006b0065006e002e0020004400650020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0075006e006e0065006e00200077006f007200640065006e002000670065006f00700065006e00640020006d006500740020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006e002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006e00200068006f006700650072002egt ESP ltFEFF0055007300650020006500730074006100730020006f007000630069006f006e006500730020007000610072006100200063007200650061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200071007500650020007000650072006d006900740061006e002000760069007300750061006c0069007a006100720020006500200069006d007000720069006d0069007200200063006f007200720065006300740061006d0065006e0074006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f007300200065006d00700072006500730061007200690061006c00650073002e0020004c006f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000730065002000700075006500640065006e00200061006200720069007200200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200079002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200079002000760065007200730069006f006e0065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE ltFEFF0041006e007600e4006e00640020006400650020006800e4007200200069006e0073007400e4006c006c006e0069006e006700610072006e00610020006e00e40072002000640075002000760069006c006c00200073006b0061007000610020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400200073006f006d00200070006100730073006100720020006600f600720020007000e5006c00690074006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f006300680020007500740073006b0072006900660074002000610076002000610066006600e4007200730064006f006b0075006d0065006e0074002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0061006e002000f600700070006e006100730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f00630068002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006c006c00650072002000730065006e006100720065002egt ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
Configuracioacuten del variador PowerFlex 4M
Los valores predeterminados en faacutebrica para los distintos paraacutemetros permiten controlar el variador desde el teclado integrado No es necesario realizar ninguna programacioacuten para iniciar parar cambiar la direccioacuten o controlar la velocidad directamente desde el teclado integrado
No obstante para este bloque modular usted estableceraacute el paraacutemetro P106 [Start Source] para control de 2 conductores En el ejemplo correspondiente a este bloque modular el variador PF 4M se utiliza en modo de control SRC de 2 conductores (surtidor interno) sin inversioacuten SRC es el ajuste predeterminado para los variadores nuevos Si su variador ya ha sido utilizado anteriormente aseguacuterese de que el interruptor SNKSRC (SinkSource) situado bajo la cubierta frontal del variador PF 4M esteacute ajustado en SRC Para otros requerimientos especiacuteficos no contemplados en este ejemplo consulte el manual de usuario del variador PF 4M
Ademaacutes usted modificaraacute el paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Sel] para visualizar lsquoMotorRunningrsquo ya que este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten vea Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores paacutegina 30
Siga este procedimiento para cambiar los paraacutemetros P106 [Start Source] y t221 [Relay Out Sel] por medio del teclado PowerFlex 4M que se describe a continuacioacuten
Teclado del PowerFlex 4M
Tecla Nombre de la tecla
Descripcioacuten
Escapebull Retroceder un paso en el modo de programacioacuten
bull Cancelar el cambio de un valor de paraacutemetro y salir del modo de programacioacuten
Selectbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Seleccionar un diacutegito al visualizar un valor de paraacutemetro
Flecha hacia arriba
bull Desplazarse por los grupos y paraacutemetros
bull Aumentar y disminuir el valor de un diacutegito parpadeanteFlecha hacia abajo
Enterbull Avanzar un paso en el menuacute de programacioacuten
bull Guardar un cambio en el valor de un paraacutemetro
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 13
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
1 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
2 Presione Sel hasta que parpadee el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo
3 Presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
4 Presione Enter
La lsquoP deja de parpadear mientras la tecla numeacuterica del extremo derecho parpadea
Por defecto se visualiza el primer paraacutemetro lsquoPrsquo P101 Si presiona la flecha hacia arriba aumenta el valor de los paraacutemetros lsquoPrsquo si presiona la flecha hacia abajo disminuye dicho valor
5 Presione la flecha hacia arriba cinco veces para visualizar P106
Se visualiza el valor actual del paraacutemetro P106 que en este caso es lsquo0rsquo
6 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo0rsquo parpadea
7 Presione dos veces la flecha hacia arriba para ajustar el valor a lsquo2rsquo
8 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado
El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
9 Presione Esc
P106 se debe visualizar con el valor 6 parpadeando
10 Presione Esc hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
11 Presione la flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo para desplazarse por el menuacute de grupo hasta llegar a la lsquotrsquo
12 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo1rsquo parpadea
Detenga el variador antes de cambiar el paraacutemetro P106
14 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
13 Presione y mantenga presionada la flecha hacia arriba hasta que llegue al valor lsquo221rsquo
Si se pasa presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta regresar al valor lsquo221rsquo
14 Presione dos veces Enter para hacer que el valor lsquo0rsquo parpadee
15 Presione la flecha hacia arriba para desplazarse hasta el valor lsquo2rsquo
16 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
17 Presione Esc
Ahora el paraacutemetro t221 se debe visualizar con el lsquo1rsquo parpadeando
18 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
19 Desconecte la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador hasta que la pantalla quede en blanco y luego vuelva a conectar la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
Ahora su variador estaacute configurado para ser controlado mediante botones y comandos de comunicacioacuten iniciados desde el controlador MicroLogix
Al igual que sucede con todos los bloques modulares eacutestos son ejemplos de coacutemo recuperar informacioacuten de un producto de forma discreta Es posible cambiar el paraacutemetro t221 u otros ajustes de los arrancadores y variadores conforme a los requisitos de su aplicacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 15
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
El controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 se debe establecer para el contactor de aislamiento y para los valores establecidos para el motor A continuacioacuten aparecen los ajustes de microinterruptor utilizados por el controlador SMC-3 y los pasos necesarios para modificarlos
SUGERENCIA El 140M MPCB especificado en la lista de materiales para este bloque modular tiene un disparo de clase 10 No obstante si en el controlador SMC-3 desea utilizar los ajustes de clase de disparo por sobrecarga puede cambiar el 140M MPCB por el 140M MCP
16 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
1 Utilizando el siguiente cuadro estableza los ajustes de microinterruptor de forma que satisfagan las necesidades de arranque de su motor
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 17
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
2 Aseguacuterese de que el microinterruptor 14 tenga el ajuste Normal (apagado)
De ese modo se introduce el contactor de aislamiento cuando el SMC-3 ha recibido la sentildeal de entrada El microinterruptor 14 tambieacuten cierra el contacto auxiliar NA montado lateralmente cuando el arrancador llega a la velocidad deseada El cierre de este contacto auxiliar enviacutea la sentildeal de vuelta al controlador MicroLogix
3 Si cambia a un MCP ajuste los microinterruptores 11 y 12 a la clase apropiada de disparo por sobrecarga
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
IMPORTANTE El arrancador 103T utiliza un 140M MCP (protector de circuitos de motor) que a su vez emplea una sobrecarga separada (E1 Plus) Usted debe ajustar esta sobrecarga conforme a las necesidades de su sistema
El arrancador 190E el arrancador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M deben tener el cuadrante de sobrecarga ajustado a 140M MPCB (disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motor)
18 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 2
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo explica coacutemo confirmar que la comunicacioacuten se estaacute desarrollando del modo deseado entre el controlador MicroLogix y los arrancadores discretos individuales asiacute como entre el controlador MicroLogix y el terminal PanelView Component Para arrancar y parar por medio del terminal PVc el interruptor HOA externo debe estar en la en posicioacuten Auto En la posicioacuten Hand o sea modo manual el terminal PVc puede leer el estado de los arrancadores y de los variadores pero no puede arrancar o parar
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y aseguacuterese de haber completado todos los pasos que aparecen en el capiacutetulo 3 de dicho documento
bull Verifique que hayan completado todos los pasos descritos en el Capiacutetulo 1 de este documento
bull Verifique que todos los dispositivos hayan sido conectados seguacuten el diagrama de cableado CAD Simple Motor Control contenido en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Compruebe que el controlador MicroLogix el variador PowerFlex y el terminal PVc esteacuten conectados a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
19Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 19
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Elementos necesarios
bull CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Computadora personal con el explorador web Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox
bull Terminal PanelView Component
bull Uno o maacutes de los siguientes variadores o arrancadores
bull Variador PowerFlex 4M
bull Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBR
bull Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE
bull Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso puede variar de acuerdo al motor
bull Controlador MicroLogix 1100 oacute 1400
bull Cable en serie nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1761-CBL-PM02
bull Cable USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 2711C-CBL-UU02 o comparable
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para verificar que existe comunicacioacuten entre sus dispositivos y para probar el sistema
Inicio
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
paacutegina 21
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador
MicroLogix paacutegina 22
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
paacutegina 25
20 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
Usted puede obtener acceso al entorno de disentildeo PanelView Explorer a traveacutes de un explorador web Para ello debe conectar su computadora al terminal PVc mediante una conexioacuten USB Antes de conectar su computadora al puerto USB del terminal PVc primero debe instalar el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device en una computadora cuyo sistema operativo sea Windows XP o Windows Vista Despueacutes de instalar el driver puede conectar el terminal PVc a su computadora Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el driver consulte el manual de usuario Terminales HMI PanelView Component publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Conexiones USB del terminal PVc
Todos los terminales PanelView Component permiten la conexioacuten mediante puerto USB y necesitan una computadora que tenga el sistema operativo Windows XP o Windows Vista ademaacutes de tener instalado el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device El driver no se puede instalar en una computadora con el sistema operativo Windows 2000
1 Conecte un extremo de un cable USB al puerto de dispositivos mini-USB de su terminal PVc
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable USB a un puerto USB de su computadora personal
3 Encienda el terminal PVc y la computadora personal
Ventana de inicio de PanelView Explorer
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 21
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU ltFEFF00560065007200770065006e00640065006e0020005300690065002000640069006500730065002000450069006e007300740065006c006c0075006e00670065006e0020007a0075006d002000450072007300740065006c006c0065006e00200076006f006e0020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e002c00200075006d002000650069006e00650020007a0075007600650072006c00e40073007300690067006500200041006e007a006500690067006500200075006e00640020004100750073006700610062006500200076006f006e00200047006500730063006800e40066007400730064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007a0075002000650072007a00690065006c0065006e002e00200044006900650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650020006b00f6006e006e0065006e0020006d006900740020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0064006500720020006d00690074002000640065006d002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200075006e00640020006800f600680065007200200067006500f600660066006e00650074002000770065007200640065006e002egt FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO ltFEFF004e00e4006900640065006e002000610073006500740075007300740065006e0020006100760075006c006c006100200076006f006900740020006c0075006f006400610020006a0061002000740075006c006f00730074006100610020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a006f006a0061002c0020006a006f006900640065006e0020006500730069006b0061007400730065006c00750020006e00e400790074007400e400e40020006c0075006f00740065007400740061007600610073007400690020006c006f00700070007500740075006c006f006b00730065006e002e0020005000440046002d0061007300690061006b00690072006a0061007400200076006f0069006400610061006e0020006100760061007400610020004100630072006f006200610074002d0020006a0061002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020002d006f0068006a0065006c006d0061006c006c0061002000740061006900200075007500640065006d006d0061006c006c0061002000760065007200730069006f006c006c0061002egt ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE ltFEFF0041006e007600e4006e00640020006400650020006800e4007200200069006e0073007400e4006c006c006e0069006e006700610072006e00610020006e00e40072002000640075002000760069006c006c00200073006b0061007000610020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400200073006f006d00200070006100730073006100720020006600f600720020007000e5006c00690074006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f006300680020007500740073006b0072006900660074002000610076002000610066006600e4007200730064006f006b0075006d0065006e0074002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0061006e002000f600700070006e006100730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f00630068002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006c006c00650072002000730065006e006100720065002egt ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
1 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
2 Presione Sel hasta que parpadee el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo
3 Presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
4 Presione Enter
La lsquoP deja de parpadear mientras la tecla numeacuterica del extremo derecho parpadea
Por defecto se visualiza el primer paraacutemetro lsquoPrsquo P101 Si presiona la flecha hacia arriba aumenta el valor de los paraacutemetros lsquoPrsquo si presiona la flecha hacia abajo disminuye dicho valor
5 Presione la flecha hacia arriba cinco veces para visualizar P106
Se visualiza el valor actual del paraacutemetro P106 que en este caso es lsquo0rsquo
6 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo0rsquo parpadea
7 Presione dos veces la flecha hacia arriba para ajustar el valor a lsquo2rsquo
8 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado
El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
9 Presione Esc
P106 se debe visualizar con el valor 6 parpadeando
10 Presione Esc hasta que el caraacutecter del extremo izquierdo se convierta en una lsquoPrsquo parpadeante
11 Presione la flecha hacia arriba o hacia abajo para desplazarse por el menuacute de grupo hasta llegar a la lsquotrsquo
12 Presione Enter
El valor lsquo1rsquo parpadea
Detenga el variador antes de cambiar el paraacutemetro P106
14 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
13 Presione y mantenga presionada la flecha hacia arriba hasta que llegue al valor lsquo221rsquo
Si se pasa presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta regresar al valor lsquo221rsquo
14 Presione dos veces Enter para hacer que el valor lsquo0rsquo parpadee
15 Presione la flecha hacia arriba para desplazarse hasta el valor lsquo2rsquo
16 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
17 Presione Esc
Ahora el paraacutemetro t221 se debe visualizar con el lsquo1rsquo parpadeando
18 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
19 Desconecte la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador hasta que la pantalla quede en blanco y luego vuelva a conectar la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
Ahora su variador estaacute configurado para ser controlado mediante botones y comandos de comunicacioacuten iniciados desde el controlador MicroLogix
Al igual que sucede con todos los bloques modulares eacutestos son ejemplos de coacutemo recuperar informacioacuten de un producto de forma discreta Es posible cambiar el paraacutemetro t221 u otros ajustes de los arrancadores y variadores conforme a los requisitos de su aplicacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 15
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
El controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 se debe establecer para el contactor de aislamiento y para los valores establecidos para el motor A continuacioacuten aparecen los ajustes de microinterruptor utilizados por el controlador SMC-3 y los pasos necesarios para modificarlos
SUGERENCIA El 140M MPCB especificado en la lista de materiales para este bloque modular tiene un disparo de clase 10 No obstante si en el controlador SMC-3 desea utilizar los ajustes de clase de disparo por sobrecarga puede cambiar el 140M MPCB por el 140M MCP
16 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
1 Utilizando el siguiente cuadro estableza los ajustes de microinterruptor de forma que satisfagan las necesidades de arranque de su motor
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 17
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
2 Aseguacuterese de que el microinterruptor 14 tenga el ajuste Normal (apagado)
De ese modo se introduce el contactor de aislamiento cuando el SMC-3 ha recibido la sentildeal de entrada El microinterruptor 14 tambieacuten cierra el contacto auxiliar NA montado lateralmente cuando el arrancador llega a la velocidad deseada El cierre de este contacto auxiliar enviacutea la sentildeal de vuelta al controlador MicroLogix
3 Si cambia a un MCP ajuste los microinterruptores 11 y 12 a la clase apropiada de disparo por sobrecarga
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
IMPORTANTE El arrancador 103T utiliza un 140M MCP (protector de circuitos de motor) que a su vez emplea una sobrecarga separada (E1 Plus) Usted debe ajustar esta sobrecarga conforme a las necesidades de su sistema
El arrancador 190E el arrancador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M deben tener el cuadrante de sobrecarga ajustado a 140M MPCB (disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motor)
18 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 2
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo explica coacutemo confirmar que la comunicacioacuten se estaacute desarrollando del modo deseado entre el controlador MicroLogix y los arrancadores discretos individuales asiacute como entre el controlador MicroLogix y el terminal PanelView Component Para arrancar y parar por medio del terminal PVc el interruptor HOA externo debe estar en la en posicioacuten Auto En la posicioacuten Hand o sea modo manual el terminal PVc puede leer el estado de los arrancadores y de los variadores pero no puede arrancar o parar
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y aseguacuterese de haber completado todos los pasos que aparecen en el capiacutetulo 3 de dicho documento
bull Verifique que hayan completado todos los pasos descritos en el Capiacutetulo 1 de este documento
bull Verifique que todos los dispositivos hayan sido conectados seguacuten el diagrama de cableado CAD Simple Motor Control contenido en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Compruebe que el controlador MicroLogix el variador PowerFlex y el terminal PVc esteacuten conectados a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
19Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 19
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Elementos necesarios
bull CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Computadora personal con el explorador web Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox
bull Terminal PanelView Component
bull Uno o maacutes de los siguientes variadores o arrancadores
bull Variador PowerFlex 4M
bull Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBR
bull Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE
bull Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso puede variar de acuerdo al motor
bull Controlador MicroLogix 1100 oacute 1400
bull Cable en serie nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1761-CBL-PM02
bull Cable USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 2711C-CBL-UU02 o comparable
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para verificar que existe comunicacioacuten entre sus dispositivos y para probar el sistema
Inicio
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
paacutegina 21
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador
MicroLogix paacutegina 22
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
paacutegina 25
20 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
Usted puede obtener acceso al entorno de disentildeo PanelView Explorer a traveacutes de un explorador web Para ello debe conectar su computadora al terminal PVc mediante una conexioacuten USB Antes de conectar su computadora al puerto USB del terminal PVc primero debe instalar el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device en una computadora cuyo sistema operativo sea Windows XP o Windows Vista Despueacutes de instalar el driver puede conectar el terminal PVc a su computadora Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el driver consulte el manual de usuario Terminales HMI PanelView Component publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Conexiones USB del terminal PVc
Todos los terminales PanelView Component permiten la conexioacuten mediante puerto USB y necesitan una computadora que tenga el sistema operativo Windows XP o Windows Vista ademaacutes de tener instalado el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device El driver no se puede instalar en una computadora con el sistema operativo Windows 2000
1 Conecte un extremo de un cable USB al puerto de dispositivos mini-USB de su terminal PVc
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable USB a un puerto USB de su computadora personal
3 Encienda el terminal PVc y la computadora personal
Ventana de inicio de PanelView Explorer
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 21
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN ltFEFF004200720075006700200064006900730073006500200069006e0064007300740069006c006c0069006e006700650072002000740069006c0020006100740020006f0070007200650074007400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002c0020006400650072002000650072002000650067006e006500640065002000740069006c0020007000e5006c006900640065006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f00670020007500640073006b007200690076006e0069006e006700200061006600200066006f0072007200650074006e0069006e006700730064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50062006e006500730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0067002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f00670020006e0079006500720065002egt NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA ltFEFF00550073006100720065002000710075006500730074006500200069006d0070006f007300740061007a0069006f006e00690020007000650072002000630072006500610072006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400690020005000440046002000610064006100740074006900200070006500720020006c00610020007300740061006d00700061002000650020006c0061002000760069007300750061006c0069007a007a0061007a0069006f006e006500200064006900200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006900200061007a00690065006e00640061006c0069002e0020004900200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740069002000500044004600200070006f00730073006f006e006f0020006500730073006500720065002000610070006500720074006900200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065002000760065007200730069006f006e006900200073007500630063006500730073006900760065002egt NOR ltFEFF004200720075006b00200064006900730073006500200069006e006e007300740069006c006c0069006e00670065006e0065002000740069006c002000e50020006f00700070007200650074007400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065007200200073006f006d002000700061007300730065007200200066006f00720020007000e5006c006900740065006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f00670020007500740073006b007200690066007400200061007600200066006f0072007200650074006e0069006e006700730064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50070006e006500730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0067002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f0067002000730065006e006500720065002egt SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
13 Presione y mantenga presionada la flecha hacia arriba hasta que llegue al valor lsquo221rsquo
Si se pasa presione la flecha hacia abajo hasta regresar al valor lsquo221rsquo
14 Presione dos veces Enter para hacer que el valor lsquo0rsquo parpadee
15 Presione la flecha hacia arriba para desplazarse hasta el valor lsquo2rsquo
16 Presione Enter
El valor queda aceptado El lsquo2rsquo ya no debe parpadear Observe que ahora el indicador verde de estado situado junto al botoacuten verde de inicio estaacute apagado
17 Presione Esc
Ahora el paraacutemetro t221 se debe visualizar con el lsquo1rsquo parpadeando
18 Presione Esc hasta visualizar lsquo00rsquo
19 Desconecte la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador hasta que la pantalla quede en blanco y luego vuelva a conectar la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
Ahora su variador estaacute configurado para ser controlado mediante botones y comandos de comunicacioacuten iniciados desde el controlador MicroLogix
Al igual que sucede con todos los bloques modulares eacutestos son ejemplos de coacutemo recuperar informacioacuten de un producto de forma discreta Es posible cambiar el paraacutemetro t221 u otros ajustes de los arrancadores y variadores conforme a los requisitos de su aplicacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 15
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
El controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 se debe establecer para el contactor de aislamiento y para los valores establecidos para el motor A continuacioacuten aparecen los ajustes de microinterruptor utilizados por el controlador SMC-3 y los pasos necesarios para modificarlos
SUGERENCIA El 140M MPCB especificado en la lista de materiales para este bloque modular tiene un disparo de clase 10 No obstante si en el controlador SMC-3 desea utilizar los ajustes de clase de disparo por sobrecarga puede cambiar el 140M MPCB por el 140M MCP
16 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
1 Utilizando el siguiente cuadro estableza los ajustes de microinterruptor de forma que satisfagan las necesidades de arranque de su motor
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 17
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
2 Aseguacuterese de que el microinterruptor 14 tenga el ajuste Normal (apagado)
De ese modo se introduce el contactor de aislamiento cuando el SMC-3 ha recibido la sentildeal de entrada El microinterruptor 14 tambieacuten cierra el contacto auxiliar NA montado lateralmente cuando el arrancador llega a la velocidad deseada El cierre de este contacto auxiliar enviacutea la sentildeal de vuelta al controlador MicroLogix
3 Si cambia a un MCP ajuste los microinterruptores 11 y 12 a la clase apropiada de disparo por sobrecarga
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
IMPORTANTE El arrancador 103T utiliza un 140M MCP (protector de circuitos de motor) que a su vez emplea una sobrecarga separada (E1 Plus) Usted debe ajustar esta sobrecarga conforme a las necesidades de su sistema
El arrancador 190E el arrancador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M deben tener el cuadrante de sobrecarga ajustado a 140M MPCB (disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motor)
18 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 2
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo explica coacutemo confirmar que la comunicacioacuten se estaacute desarrollando del modo deseado entre el controlador MicroLogix y los arrancadores discretos individuales asiacute como entre el controlador MicroLogix y el terminal PanelView Component Para arrancar y parar por medio del terminal PVc el interruptor HOA externo debe estar en la en posicioacuten Auto En la posicioacuten Hand o sea modo manual el terminal PVc puede leer el estado de los arrancadores y de los variadores pero no puede arrancar o parar
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y aseguacuterese de haber completado todos los pasos que aparecen en el capiacutetulo 3 de dicho documento
bull Verifique que hayan completado todos los pasos descritos en el Capiacutetulo 1 de este documento
bull Verifique que todos los dispositivos hayan sido conectados seguacuten el diagrama de cableado CAD Simple Motor Control contenido en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Compruebe que el controlador MicroLogix el variador PowerFlex y el terminal PVc esteacuten conectados a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
19Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 19
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Elementos necesarios
bull CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Computadora personal con el explorador web Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox
bull Terminal PanelView Component
bull Uno o maacutes de los siguientes variadores o arrancadores
bull Variador PowerFlex 4M
bull Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBR
bull Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE
bull Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso puede variar de acuerdo al motor
bull Controlador MicroLogix 1100 oacute 1400
bull Cable en serie nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1761-CBL-PM02
bull Cable USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 2711C-CBL-UU02 o comparable
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para verificar que existe comunicacioacuten entre sus dispositivos y para probar el sistema
Inicio
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
paacutegina 21
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador
MicroLogix paacutegina 22
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
paacutegina 25
20 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
Usted puede obtener acceso al entorno de disentildeo PanelView Explorer a traveacutes de un explorador web Para ello debe conectar su computadora al terminal PVc mediante una conexioacuten USB Antes de conectar su computadora al puerto USB del terminal PVc primero debe instalar el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device en una computadora cuyo sistema operativo sea Windows XP o Windows Vista Despueacutes de instalar el driver puede conectar el terminal PVc a su computadora Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el driver consulte el manual de usuario Terminales HMI PanelView Component publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Conexiones USB del terminal PVc
Todos los terminales PanelView Component permiten la conexioacuten mediante puerto USB y necesitan una computadora que tenga el sistema operativo Windows XP o Windows Vista ademaacutes de tener instalado el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device El driver no se puede instalar en una computadora con el sistema operativo Windows 2000
1 Conecte un extremo de un cable USB al puerto de dispositivos mini-USB de su terminal PVc
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable USB a un puerto USB de su computadora personal
3 Encienda el terminal PVc y la computadora personal
Ventana de inicio de PanelView Explorer
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 21
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU ltFEFF00560065007200770065006e00640065006e0020005300690065002000640069006500730065002000450069006e007300740065006c006c0075006e00670065006e0020007a0075006d002000450072007300740065006c006c0065006e00200076006f006e0020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e002c00200075006d002000650069006e00650020007a0075007600650072006c00e40073007300690067006500200041006e007a006500690067006500200075006e00640020004100750073006700610062006500200076006f006e00200047006500730063006800e40066007400730064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007a0075002000650072007a00690065006c0065006e002e00200044006900650020005000440046002d0044006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650020006b00f6006e006e0065006e0020006d006900740020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0064006500720020006d00690074002000640065006d002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200075006e00640020006800f600680065007200200067006500f600660066006e00650074002000770065007200640065006e002egt FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR ltFEFF004200720075006b00200064006900730073006500200069006e006e007300740069006c006c0069006e00670065006e0065002000740069006c002000e50020006f00700070007200650074007400650020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065007200200073006f006d002000700061007300730065007200200066006f00720020007000e5006c006900740065006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f00670020007500740073006b007200690066007400200061007600200066006f0072007200650074006e0069006e006700730064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400650072002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e00650020006b0061006e002000e50070006e006500730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f0067002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006f0067002000730065006e006500720065002egt SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
Configuracioacuten del controlador SMC-3
El controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 se debe establecer para el contactor de aislamiento y para los valores establecidos para el motor A continuacioacuten aparecen los ajustes de microinterruptor utilizados por el controlador SMC-3 y los pasos necesarios para modificarlos
SUGERENCIA El 140M MPCB especificado en la lista de materiales para este bloque modular tiene un disparo de clase 10 No obstante si en el controlador SMC-3 desea utilizar los ajustes de clase de disparo por sobrecarga puede cambiar el 140M MPCB por el 140M MCP
16 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
1 Utilizando el siguiente cuadro estableza los ajustes de microinterruptor de forma que satisfagan las necesidades de arranque de su motor
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 17
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
2 Aseguacuterese de que el microinterruptor 14 tenga el ajuste Normal (apagado)
De ese modo se introduce el contactor de aislamiento cuando el SMC-3 ha recibido la sentildeal de entrada El microinterruptor 14 tambieacuten cierra el contacto auxiliar NA montado lateralmente cuando el arrancador llega a la velocidad deseada El cierre de este contacto auxiliar enviacutea la sentildeal de vuelta al controlador MicroLogix
3 Si cambia a un MCP ajuste los microinterruptores 11 y 12 a la clase apropiada de disparo por sobrecarga
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
IMPORTANTE El arrancador 103T utiliza un 140M MCP (protector de circuitos de motor) que a su vez emplea una sobrecarga separada (E1 Plus) Usted debe ajustar esta sobrecarga conforme a las necesidades de su sistema
El arrancador 190E el arrancador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M deben tener el cuadrante de sobrecarga ajustado a 140M MPCB (disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motor)
18 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 2
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo explica coacutemo confirmar que la comunicacioacuten se estaacute desarrollando del modo deseado entre el controlador MicroLogix y los arrancadores discretos individuales asiacute como entre el controlador MicroLogix y el terminal PanelView Component Para arrancar y parar por medio del terminal PVc el interruptor HOA externo debe estar en la en posicioacuten Auto En la posicioacuten Hand o sea modo manual el terminal PVc puede leer el estado de los arrancadores y de los variadores pero no puede arrancar o parar
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y aseguacuterese de haber completado todos los pasos que aparecen en el capiacutetulo 3 de dicho documento
bull Verifique que hayan completado todos los pasos descritos en el Capiacutetulo 1 de este documento
bull Verifique que todos los dispositivos hayan sido conectados seguacuten el diagrama de cableado CAD Simple Motor Control contenido en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Compruebe que el controlador MicroLogix el variador PowerFlex y el terminal PVc esteacuten conectados a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
19Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 19
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Elementos necesarios
bull CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Computadora personal con el explorador web Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox
bull Terminal PanelView Component
bull Uno o maacutes de los siguientes variadores o arrancadores
bull Variador PowerFlex 4M
bull Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBR
bull Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE
bull Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso puede variar de acuerdo al motor
bull Controlador MicroLogix 1100 oacute 1400
bull Cable en serie nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1761-CBL-PM02
bull Cable USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 2711C-CBL-UU02 o comparable
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para verificar que existe comunicacioacuten entre sus dispositivos y para probar el sistema
Inicio
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
paacutegina 21
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador
MicroLogix paacutegina 22
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
paacutegina 25
20 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
Usted puede obtener acceso al entorno de disentildeo PanelView Explorer a traveacutes de un explorador web Para ello debe conectar su computadora al terminal PVc mediante una conexioacuten USB Antes de conectar su computadora al puerto USB del terminal PVc primero debe instalar el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device en una computadora cuyo sistema operativo sea Windows XP o Windows Vista Despueacutes de instalar el driver puede conectar el terminal PVc a su computadora Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el driver consulte el manual de usuario Terminales HMI PanelView Component publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Conexiones USB del terminal PVc
Todos los terminales PanelView Component permiten la conexioacuten mediante puerto USB y necesitan una computadora que tenga el sistema operativo Windows XP o Windows Vista ademaacutes de tener instalado el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device El driver no se puede instalar en una computadora con el sistema operativo Windows 2000
1 Conecte un extremo de un cable USB al puerto de dispositivos mini-USB de su terminal PVc
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable USB a un puerto USB de su computadora personal
3 Encienda el terminal PVc y la computadora personal
Ventana de inicio de PanelView Explorer
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 21
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA ltFEFF004f007000740069006f006e00730020007000650072006d0065007400740061006e007400200064006500200063007200e900650072002000640065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400730020005000440046002000700072006f00660065007300730069006f006e006e0065006c007300200066006900610062006c0065007300200070006f007500720020006c0061002000760069007300750061006c00690073006100740069006f006e0020006500740020006c00270069006d007000720065007300730069006f006e002e00200049006c002000650073007400200070006f0073007300690062006c0065002000640027006f00750076007200690072002000630065007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400730020005000440046002000640061006e00730020004100630072006f0062006100740020006500740020005200650061006400650072002c002000760065007200730069006f006e002000200035002e00300020006f007500200075006c007400e9007200690065007500720065002egt PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP ltFEFF0055007300650020006500730074006100730020006f007000630069006f006e006500730020007000610072006100200063007200650061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200071007500650020007000650072006d006900740061006e002000760069007300750061006c0069007a006100720020006500200069006d007000720069006d0069007200200063006f007200720065006300740061006d0065006e0074006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f007300200065006d00700072006500730061007200690061006c00650073002e0020004c006f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000730065002000700075006500640065006e00200061006200720069007200200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200079002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200079002000760065007200730069006f006e0065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Integracioacuten simple de control de motores Capiacutetulo 1
1 Utilizando el siguiente cuadro estableza los ajustes de microinterruptor de forma que satisfagan las necesidades de arranque de su motor
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 17
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
2 Aseguacuterese de que el microinterruptor 14 tenga el ajuste Normal (apagado)
De ese modo se introduce el contactor de aislamiento cuando el SMC-3 ha recibido la sentildeal de entrada El microinterruptor 14 tambieacuten cierra el contacto auxiliar NA montado lateralmente cuando el arrancador llega a la velocidad deseada El cierre de este contacto auxiliar enviacutea la sentildeal de vuelta al controlador MicroLogix
3 Si cambia a un MCP ajuste los microinterruptores 11 y 12 a la clase apropiada de disparo por sobrecarga
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
IMPORTANTE El arrancador 103T utiliza un 140M MCP (protector de circuitos de motor) que a su vez emplea una sobrecarga separada (E1 Plus) Usted debe ajustar esta sobrecarga conforme a las necesidades de su sistema
El arrancador 190E el arrancador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M deben tener el cuadrante de sobrecarga ajustado a 140M MPCB (disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motor)
18 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 2
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo explica coacutemo confirmar que la comunicacioacuten se estaacute desarrollando del modo deseado entre el controlador MicroLogix y los arrancadores discretos individuales asiacute como entre el controlador MicroLogix y el terminal PanelView Component Para arrancar y parar por medio del terminal PVc el interruptor HOA externo debe estar en la en posicioacuten Auto En la posicioacuten Hand o sea modo manual el terminal PVc puede leer el estado de los arrancadores y de los variadores pero no puede arrancar o parar
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y aseguacuterese de haber completado todos los pasos que aparecen en el capiacutetulo 3 de dicho documento
bull Verifique que hayan completado todos los pasos descritos en el Capiacutetulo 1 de este documento
bull Verifique que todos los dispositivos hayan sido conectados seguacuten el diagrama de cableado CAD Simple Motor Control contenido en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Compruebe que el controlador MicroLogix el variador PowerFlex y el terminal PVc esteacuten conectados a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
19Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 19
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Elementos necesarios
bull CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Computadora personal con el explorador web Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox
bull Terminal PanelView Component
bull Uno o maacutes de los siguientes variadores o arrancadores
bull Variador PowerFlex 4M
bull Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBR
bull Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE
bull Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso puede variar de acuerdo al motor
bull Controlador MicroLogix 1100 oacute 1400
bull Cable en serie nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1761-CBL-PM02
bull Cable USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 2711C-CBL-UU02 o comparable
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para verificar que existe comunicacioacuten entre sus dispositivos y para probar el sistema
Inicio
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
paacutegina 21
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador
MicroLogix paacutegina 22
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
paacutegina 25
20 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
Usted puede obtener acceso al entorno de disentildeo PanelView Explorer a traveacutes de un explorador web Para ello debe conectar su computadora al terminal PVc mediante una conexioacuten USB Antes de conectar su computadora al puerto USB del terminal PVc primero debe instalar el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device en una computadora cuyo sistema operativo sea Windows XP o Windows Vista Despueacutes de instalar el driver puede conectar el terminal PVc a su computadora Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el driver consulte el manual de usuario Terminales HMI PanelView Component publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Conexiones USB del terminal PVc
Todos los terminales PanelView Component permiten la conexioacuten mediante puerto USB y necesitan una computadora que tenga el sistema operativo Windows XP o Windows Vista ademaacutes de tener instalado el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device El driver no se puede instalar en una computadora con el sistema operativo Windows 2000
1 Conecte un extremo de un cable USB al puerto de dispositivos mini-USB de su terminal PVc
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable USB a un puerto USB de su computadora personal
3 Encienda el terminal PVc y la computadora personal
Ventana de inicio de PanelView Explorer
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 21
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Capiacutetulo 1 Integracioacuten simple de control de motores
2 Aseguacuterese de que el microinterruptor 14 tenga el ajuste Normal (apagado)
De ese modo se introduce el contactor de aislamiento cuando el SMC-3 ha recibido la sentildeal de entrada El microinterruptor 14 tambieacuten cierra el contacto auxiliar NA montado lateralmente cuando el arrancador llega a la velocidad deseada El cierre de este contacto auxiliar enviacutea la sentildeal de vuelta al controlador MicroLogix
3 Si cambia a un MCP ajuste los microinterruptores 11 y 12 a la clase apropiada de disparo por sobrecarga
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
IMPORTANTE El arrancador 103T utiliza un 140M MCP (protector de circuitos de motor) que a su vez emplea una sobrecarga separada (E1 Plus) Usted debe ajustar esta sobrecarga conforme a las necesidades de su sistema
El arrancador 190E el arrancador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M deben tener el cuadrante de sobrecarga ajustado a 140M MPCB (disyuntores de proteccioacuten de motor)
18 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Capiacutetulo 2
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo explica coacutemo confirmar que la comunicacioacuten se estaacute desarrollando del modo deseado entre el controlador MicroLogix y los arrancadores discretos individuales asiacute como entre el controlador MicroLogix y el terminal PanelView Component Para arrancar y parar por medio del terminal PVc el interruptor HOA externo debe estar en la en posicioacuten Auto En la posicioacuten Hand o sea modo manual el terminal PVc puede leer el estado de los arrancadores y de los variadores pero no puede arrancar o parar
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y aseguacuterese de haber completado todos los pasos que aparecen en el capiacutetulo 3 de dicho documento
bull Verifique que hayan completado todos los pasos descritos en el Capiacutetulo 1 de este documento
bull Verifique que todos los dispositivos hayan sido conectados seguacuten el diagrama de cableado CAD Simple Motor Control contenido en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Compruebe que el controlador MicroLogix el variador PowerFlex y el terminal PVc esteacuten conectados a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
19Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 19
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Elementos necesarios
bull CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Computadora personal con el explorador web Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox
bull Terminal PanelView Component
bull Uno o maacutes de los siguientes variadores o arrancadores
bull Variador PowerFlex 4M
bull Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBR
bull Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE
bull Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso puede variar de acuerdo al motor
bull Controlador MicroLogix 1100 oacute 1400
bull Cable en serie nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1761-CBL-PM02
bull Cable USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 2711C-CBL-UU02 o comparable
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para verificar que existe comunicacioacuten entre sus dispositivos y para probar el sistema
Inicio
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
paacutegina 21
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador
MicroLogix paacutegina 22
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
paacutegina 25
20 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
Usted puede obtener acceso al entorno de disentildeo PanelView Explorer a traveacutes de un explorador web Para ello debe conectar su computadora al terminal PVc mediante una conexioacuten USB Antes de conectar su computadora al puerto USB del terminal PVc primero debe instalar el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device en una computadora cuyo sistema operativo sea Windows XP o Windows Vista Despueacutes de instalar el driver puede conectar el terminal PVc a su computadora Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el driver consulte el manual de usuario Terminales HMI PanelView Component publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Conexiones USB del terminal PVc
Todos los terminales PanelView Component permiten la conexioacuten mediante puerto USB y necesitan una computadora que tenga el sistema operativo Windows XP o Windows Vista ademaacutes de tener instalado el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device El driver no se puede instalar en una computadora con el sistema operativo Windows 2000
1 Conecte un extremo de un cable USB al puerto de dispositivos mini-USB de su terminal PVc
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable USB a un puerto USB de su computadora personal
3 Encienda el terminal PVc y la computadora personal
Ventana de inicio de PanelView Explorer
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 21
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD ltFEFF004700650062007200750069006b002000640065007a006500200069006e007300740065006c006c0069006e00670065006e0020006f006d0020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007400650020006d0061006b0065006e00200064006900650020006700650073006300680069006b00740020007a0069006a006e0020006f006d0020007a0061006b0065006c0069006a006b006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e00200062006500740072006f0075007700620061006100720020007700650065007200200074006500200067006500760065006e00200065006e0020006100660020007400650020006400720075006b006b0065006e002e0020004400650020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0075006e006e0065006e00200077006f007200640065006e002000670065006f00700065006e00640020006d006500740020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006e002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006e00200068006f006700650072002egt ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA ltFEFF00550073006100720065002000710075006500730074006500200069006d0070006f007300740061007a0069006f006e00690020007000650072002000630072006500610072006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400690020005000440046002000610064006100740074006900200070006500720020006c00610020007300740061006d00700061002000650020006c0061002000760069007300750061006c0069007a007a0061007a0069006f006e006500200064006900200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006900200061007a00690065006e00640061006c0069002e0020004900200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740069002000500044004600200070006f00730073006f006e006f0020006500730073006500720065002000610070006500720074006900200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065002000760065007200730069006f006e006900200073007500630063006500730073006900760065002egt NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Capiacutetulo 2
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Introduccioacuten
Este capiacutetulo explica coacutemo confirmar que la comunicacioacuten se estaacute desarrollando del modo deseado entre el controlador MicroLogix y los arrancadores discretos individuales asiacute como entre el controlador MicroLogix y el terminal PanelView Component Para arrancar y parar por medio del terminal PVc el interruptor HOA externo debe estar en la en posicioacuten Auto En la posicioacuten Hand o sea modo manual el terminal PVc puede leer el estado de los arrancadores y de los variadores pero no puede arrancar o parar
Antes de comenzar
bull Revise iacutentegramente el documento Bloques baacutesicos de componentes conectados Inicio raacutepido publicacioacuten CC-QS001 y aseguacuterese de haber completado todos los pasos que aparecen en el capiacutetulo 3 de dicho documento
bull Verifique que hayan completado todos los pasos descritos en el Capiacutetulo 1 de este documento
bull Verifique que todos los dispositivos hayan sido conectados seguacuten el diagrama de cableado CAD Simple Motor Control contenido en el CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Compruebe que el controlador MicroLogix el variador PowerFlex y el terminal PVc esteacuten conectados a la alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica
19Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 19
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Elementos necesarios
bull CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Computadora personal con el explorador web Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox
bull Terminal PanelView Component
bull Uno o maacutes de los siguientes variadores o arrancadores
bull Variador PowerFlex 4M
bull Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBR
bull Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE
bull Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso puede variar de acuerdo al motor
bull Controlador MicroLogix 1100 oacute 1400
bull Cable en serie nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1761-CBL-PM02
bull Cable USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 2711C-CBL-UU02 o comparable
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para verificar que existe comunicacioacuten entre sus dispositivos y para probar el sistema
Inicio
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
paacutegina 21
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador
MicroLogix paacutegina 22
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
paacutegina 25
20 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
Usted puede obtener acceso al entorno de disentildeo PanelView Explorer a traveacutes de un explorador web Para ello debe conectar su computadora al terminal PVc mediante una conexioacuten USB Antes de conectar su computadora al puerto USB del terminal PVc primero debe instalar el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device en una computadora cuyo sistema operativo sea Windows XP o Windows Vista Despueacutes de instalar el driver puede conectar el terminal PVc a su computadora Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el driver consulte el manual de usuario Terminales HMI PanelView Component publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Conexiones USB del terminal PVc
Todos los terminales PanelView Component permiten la conexioacuten mediante puerto USB y necesitan una computadora que tenga el sistema operativo Windows XP o Windows Vista ademaacutes de tener instalado el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device El driver no se puede instalar en una computadora con el sistema operativo Windows 2000
1 Conecte un extremo de un cable USB al puerto de dispositivos mini-USB de su terminal PVc
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable USB a un puerto USB de su computadora personal
3 Encienda el terminal PVc y la computadora personal
Ventana de inicio de PanelView Explorer
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 21
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Elementos necesarios
bull CD de Connected Component Building Blocks Overview publicacioacuten CC-QR001
bull Computadora personal con el explorador web Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox
bull Terminal PanelView Component
bull Uno o maacutes de los siguientes variadores o arrancadores
bull Variador PowerFlex 4M
bull Controlador inteligente de motores SMC-3 nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 150-C3NBR
bull Arrancador 103T nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 103T-AWDJ4-QB25S-E1C-KN-TE
bull Arrancador 190E nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 190E-ANEJ2-CB25S-KN-S10-TE
Los arrancadores 103T y 190E se pueden solicitar en piezas pero lo maacutes faacutecil es pedir el arrancador completo El nuacutemero de cataacutelogo adecuado para su caso puede variar de acuerdo al motor
bull Controlador MicroLogix 1100 oacute 1400
bull Cable en serie nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 1761-CBL-PM02
bull Cable USB nuacutemero de cataacutelogo 2711C-CBL-UU02 o comparable
Siga estos pasos
Siga estos pasos para verificar que existe comunicacioacuten entre sus dispositivos y para probar el sistema
Inicio
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
paacutegina 21
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador
MicroLogix paacutegina 22
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
paacutegina 25
20 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
Usted puede obtener acceso al entorno de disentildeo PanelView Explorer a traveacutes de un explorador web Para ello debe conectar su computadora al terminal PVc mediante una conexioacuten USB Antes de conectar su computadora al puerto USB del terminal PVc primero debe instalar el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device en una computadora cuyo sistema operativo sea Windows XP o Windows Vista Despueacutes de instalar el driver puede conectar el terminal PVc a su computadora Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el driver consulte el manual de usuario Terminales HMI PanelView Component publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Conexiones USB del terminal PVc
Todos los terminales PanelView Component permiten la conexioacuten mediante puerto USB y necesitan una computadora que tenga el sistema operativo Windows XP o Windows Vista ademaacutes de tener instalado el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device El driver no se puede instalar en una computadora con el sistema operativo Windows 2000
1 Conecte un extremo de un cable USB al puerto de dispositivos mini-USB de su terminal PVc
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable USB a un puerto USB de su computadora personal
3 Encienda el terminal PVc y la computadora personal
Ventana de inicio de PanelView Explorer
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 21
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE ltFEFF0041006e007600e4006e00640020006400650020006800e4007200200069006e0073007400e4006c006c006e0069006e006700610072006e00610020006e00e40072002000640075002000760069006c006c00200073006b0061007000610020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400200073006f006d00200070006100730073006100720020006600f600720020007000e5006c00690074006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f006300680020007500740073006b0072006900660074002000610076002000610066006600e4007200730064006f006b0075006d0065006e0074002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0061006e002000f600700070006e006100730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f00630068002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006c006c00650072002000730065006e006100720065002egt ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Conexioacuten del terminal PVc a la computadora personal
Usted puede obtener acceso al entorno de disentildeo PanelView Explorer a traveacutes de un explorador web Para ello debe conectar su computadora al terminal PVc mediante una conexioacuten USB Antes de conectar su computadora al puerto USB del terminal PVc primero debe instalar el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device en una computadora cuyo sistema operativo sea Windows XP o Windows Vista Despueacutes de instalar el driver puede conectar el terminal PVc a su computadora Para obtener maacutes informacioacuten sobre coacutemo instalar el driver consulte el manual de usuario Terminales HMI PanelView Component publicacioacuten 2711C-UM001
Conexiones USB del terminal PVc
Todos los terminales PanelView Component permiten la conexioacuten mediante puerto USB y necesitan una computadora que tenga el sistema operativo Windows XP o Windows Vista ademaacutes de tener instalado el driver PanelView USB RNDIS Device El driver no se puede instalar en una computadora con el sistema operativo Windows 2000
1 Conecte un extremo de un cable USB al puerto de dispositivos mini-USB de su terminal PVc
2 Conecte el otro extremo del cable USB a un puerto USB de su computadora personal
3 Encienda el terminal PVc y la computadora personal
Ventana de inicio de PanelView Explorer
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 21
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Configure el terminal PVc para la comunicacioacuten con el controlador MicroLogix
El terminal PanelView Component (PVc) con pantalla taacutectil monocroma de 3 pulgadas se comunica con el controlador MicroLogix mediante la red DF1 La aplicacioacuten del PVc lee y escribe en la tabla de datos del controlador MicroLogix Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc escribe en el controlador MicroLogix el programa del controlador detecta el cambio de valor y escribe el nuevo valor en el variador arrancador suave o arrancador discreto apropiado
1 Conecte la computadora personal al terminal PVc mediante un cable USB
2 Conecte el terminal PVc al controlador MicroLogix mediante el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02
3 Inicie Internet Explorer 7 o Firefox 20
4 En la barra de direcciones de su explorador escriba la direccioacuten IP 1692542542 (se trata de una direccioacuten IP fija utilizada por el puerto USB)
5 Presione Enter para conectar su computadora personal al terminal PVc
Cable USB 2711C-CBL-UU02
Puerto USB
Puerto USB
Controlador MicroLogix
1761-CBL-PM02
22 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD ltFEFF004700650062007200750069006b002000640065007a006500200069006e007300740065006c006c0069006e00670065006e0020006f006d0020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020007400650020006d0061006b0065006e00200064006900650020006700650073006300680069006b00740020007a0069006a006e0020006f006d0020007a0061006b0065006c0069006a006b006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e00200062006500740072006f0075007700620061006100720020007700650065007200200074006500200067006500760065006e00200065006e0020006100660020007400650020006400720075006b006b0065006e002e0020004400650020005000440046002d0064006f00630075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0075006e006e0065006e00200077006f007200640065006e002000670065006f00700065006e00640020006d006500740020004100630072006f00620061007400200065006e002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006e00200068006f006700650072002egt ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
6 Seleccione el nombre de la aplicacioacuten en el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo del PVc y luego haga clic en Edit
7 En el cuadro de diaacutelogo ldquoEditrdquo haga clic en la ficha ldquoCommunicationrdquo
Aparece el siguiente cuadro de diaacutelogo
8 En el campo ldquoProtocolrdquo haga clic en ldquoSerialrdquo y seleccione DF1 en la lista desplegable
9 En el campo ldquoPanelView Component Settingsrdquo compruebe que bajo ldquoStation Addressrdquo aparezca un 2
Botoacuten de validacioacuten
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 23
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA ltFEFF00550073006100720065002000710075006500730074006500200069006d0070006f007300740061007a0069006f006e00690020007000650072002000630072006500610072006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400690020005000440046002000610064006100740074006900200070006500720020006c00610020007300740061006d00700061002000650020006c0061002000760069007300750061006c0069007a007a0061007a0069006f006e006500200064006900200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006900200061007a00690065006e00640061006c0069002e0020004900200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740069002000500044004600200070006f00730073006f006e006f0020006500730073006500720065002000610070006500720074006900200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065002000760065007200730069006f006e006900200073007500630063006500730073006900760065002egt NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
10 En el campo ldquoController Settingsrdquo
a Acepte el nombre predeterminado (PLC-1)b En el campo ldquoController Typerdquo seleccione MicroLogixc En el campo ldquoAddressrdquo escriba 1
11 Haga clic en ldquoValidaterdquo
12 Haga clic en ldquoSaverdquo
13 Haga clic en ldquoSwitchrdquo para iniciar PanelView Explorer
14 En la ventana ldquoApplication Dashboardrdquo seleccione la aplicacioacuten ldquoSimple Starting Building Blockrdquo
15 Haga clic en ldquoRunrdquo para ejecutar la aplicacioacuten
Navegacioacuten por la paacutegina Starters Overview
Cuando la aplicacioacuten PVc se esteacute ejecutando cualquier variador o arrancador que esteacute habilitado aparece en la pantalla ldquoStarters Overviewrdquo con el estado lsquo140M Onrsquo lsquoRunningrsquo o lsquoFaultrsquo Para facilitar al fabricante original de equipos el uso de este programa el encabezado del arrancador se deja geneacuterico de ese modo los arrancadores se pueden cambiar sin necesidad de cambiar la primera paacutegina del PVc Para cambiar los botones en siacute consulte el manual de usuario de los terminales HMI de PanelView Component
bull lsquoM1rsquo estaacute asignado al controlador SMC-3
bull lsquoM2rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 103T
bull lsquoM3rsquo estaacute asignado al variador PF 4M
bull lsquoM4rsquo estaacute asignado al arrancador 190E
24 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE ltFEFF0041006e007600e4006e00640020006400650020006800e4007200200069006e0073007400e4006c006c006e0069006e006700610072006e00610020006e00e40072002000640075002000760069006c006c00200073006b0061007000610020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400200073006f006d00200070006100730073006100720020006600f600720020007000e5006c00690074006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f006300680020007500740073006b0072006900660074002000610076002000610066006600e4007200730064006f006b0075006d0065006e0074002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0061006e002000f600700070006e006100730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f00630068002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006c006c00650072002000730065006e006100720065002egt ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el arrancador estaacute parado
bull ldquo140M Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten ldquoonrdquo en relacioacuten con el variador o con el arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquoStartingrdquo (no se muestra) indica que el arrancador o que el variador estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoRunningrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha basaacutendose en la retroalimentacioacuten procedente del arrancador o del variador
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que existe sobrecarga cortocircuito u otro fallo detectado por el arrancador
Si toca en cualquier punto de las indicaciones Stopped 140M On Running Fault o M entraraacute a las pantallas individuales de cada arrancador independientemente del estado mostrado
Test de funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Ahora que el terminal PVc se estaacute comunicando correctamente con el controlador MicroLogix puede probar el funcionamiento de la aplicacioacuten Simple Starting
Navegacioacuten por la pantalla Simple Starting
Toque cualquiera de los botones MTR o M de la pantalla Starters Overview para obtener acceso a la pantalla individual de cada arrancador La siguiente Figura muestra las pantallas de los arrancadores SMC-3 y VFD
SUGERENCIA Llegado a este punto usted puede si lo decide editar la pantalla Starters Overview y borrar los botones o indicadores de estado asociados con arrancadores o variadores que no existen
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 25
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
La en la esquina superior derecha cierra la aplicacioacuten y conduce a la pantalla Starters Overview del terminal PVc
Las pantallas 190E y 103T son similares a la del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten de fallo que aparece en la pantalla del arrancador
La pantalla SMC-3 muestra los siguientes estados
La columna derecha de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoStartrdquo es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo de arranque que aparece cuando el arrancadoro el variador estaacute en modo automaacutetico y el 140M estaacute listo Al tocar este botoacuten arranca el arrancador o el variador
bull ldquoStoprdquo tambieacuten es un botoacuten momentaacuteneo Al tocar este botoacuten se para el arrancador o el variador
Si el selector HOA (Hand Off Auto) no estaacute en ldquoAutordquo los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo no quedan visibles tampoco lo estaacuten sin una sentildeal 3 Ph On En este bloque modular el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo1rsquo al PLC indica una posicioacuten ldquoAutordquo y el retorno de una sentildeal de lsquo0rsquo indica una posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo (manual) o ldquoOff rdquo (desconexioacuten) Usted puede agregar un bloque de contactos adicional al HOA para la posicioacuten ldquoHandrdquo y retroalimentacioacuten al PLC para proporcionar ese mismo estado
La columna central de la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 indica lo siguiente
bull ldquo3 Ph Onrdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOnrsquo para el variador o arrancador especiacutefico
bull ldquo3 Ph Off rdquo indica que la sobrecarga 140M estaacute en la posicioacuten lsquoOff rsquo
bull ldquoStoppedrdquo indica que el controlador SMC-3 estaacute parado
bull ldquoStartingrdquo indica que el motor estaacute arrancando
bull ldquoAt Speedrdquo indica que el motor estaacute en marcha y ha llega a la velocidad deseada
bull ldquoStart Failrdquo indica que el arrancador o variador ha recibido una sentildeal de arranque pero no ha arrancado dentro del tiempo definido en el programa RSLogix
Causasremedios Si recibe la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo revise el arrancador el variador yo el motor y observe si presenta dantildeos o problemas de cableado Ademaacutes la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo puede aparecer debido a que en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix el tiempo asignado al temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten es demasiado corto Veacutease Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten maacutes adelante
Procedimiento de restablecimiento Para restablecer la indicacioacuten ldquoStart Failrdquo en el terminal PVc cuando se esteacute utilizando el controlador SMC-3 o el arrancador 103T o 190E gire la perilla frontal del 140M MPCB o el MCP hasta la posicioacuten de desconexioacuten y luego de nuevo hasta la de conexioacuten para borrar la indicacioacuten Para borrar esta indicacioacuten en el variador presione el botoacuten de paro en el terminal PVc en modo ldquoAutordquo o bien presione el botoacuten de paro en modo ldquoHandrdquo
Temporizador de retardo a la conexioacuten El temporizador arranca cuando se enviacutea la sentildeal de arranque al arrancador o al variador Al final de la temporizacioacuten se efectuacutea una comparacioacuten para ver si el motor realmente ha arrancado La duracioacuten de la funcioacuten ldquotemporizador de retardo a la conexioacutenrdquo se puede
26 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP ltFEFF0055007300650020006500730074006100730020006f007000630069006f006e006500730020007000610072006100200063007200650061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200071007500650020007000650072006d006900740061006e002000760069007300750061006c0069007a006100720020006500200069006d007000720069006d0069007200200063006f007200720065006300740061006d0065006e0074006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f007300200065006d00700072006500730061007200690061006c00650073002e0020004c006f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000730065002000700075006500640065006e00200061006200720069007200200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200079002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200079002000760065007200730069006f006e0065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
ajustar en el programa de loacutegica de escalera del controlador Micrologix Para este bloque modular los temporizadores estaacuten ajustados a 35 segundos para el controlador SMC-3 y para el variador PF 4M y a 5 segundos para los arrancadores 103T y 190E Compruebe el rengloacuten 3 oacute 4 del programa predeterminado para el temporizador
La columna izquierda de la pantalla del arrancador indica lo siguiente
bull ldquoFaultrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un fallo
No todos los arrancadores tienen esta capacidad
El controlador SMC-3 y el variador PF 4M pueden proporcionar esta informacioacuten Cuando la indicacioacuten de fallo aparece en el controlador SMC-3 al tocar ldquoFaultrdquo se obtiene acceso a la pantalla con la lista de fallos del controlador
La pantalla VFD del variador PF 4M siempre muestra el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo Si aparece un fallo en el variador PF 4M el coacutedigo de fallo se visualiza en el variador Para visualizar la descripcioacuten del fallo puede presionar el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la terminal del PVc Asimismo puede desplazarse a traveacutes de la lista de fallos igual que con el controlador SMC-3
La indicacioacuten en la pantalla del arrancador 103T o 190E carece de esta funcioacuten de visualizacioacuten de fallos dado que estos arrancadores no proporcionan informacioacuten adicional
bull ldquoOVLDrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado una sobrecarga
bull ldquoSCrdquo indica que el arrancador ha detectado un cortocircuito
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 27
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE ltFEFF0041006e007600e4006e00640020006400650020006800e4007200200069006e0073007400e4006c006c006e0069006e006700610072006e00610020006e00e40072002000640075002000760069006c006c00200073006b0061007000610020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400200073006f006d00200070006100730073006100720020006600f600720020007000e5006c00690074006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f006300680020007500740073006b0072006900660074002000610076002000610066006600e4007200730064006f006b0075006d0065006e0074002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0061006e002000f600700070006e006100730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f00630068002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006c006c00650072002000730065006e006100720065002egt ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
Coacutemo interpretar los fallos
El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo siempre estaacute presente en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc Este botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo es simplemente un botoacuten para ldquoir ardquo y por si mismo no indica que haya un fallo en el variador PF 4M El controlador SMC-3 sin embargo enviacutea una sentildeal de regreso al terminal PVc indicando la existencia de un fallo en el controlador Cuando esto sucede el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo para GO TO se visualiza en la pantalla lsquoSMC-3rsquo del terminal PVc Si usted presiona el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoVFDrsquo o en la pantalla de fallo del lsquoSMC-3rsquo obtendraacute acceso a las pantallas respectivas de fallo individuales en las que podraacute navegar hasta encontrar el fallo indicado en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3 asiacute como su descripcioacuten correspondiente
Pantalla de fallo rsquoVFDrsquo (para el variador PF 4M)
Pantalla de fallo lsquoSMC-3rsquo
En ambos casos observe el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador PF 4M o en el controlador SMC-3
bull En el caso del variador PF 4M usted debe visualizar el coacutedigo de fallo en el variador Presione el botoacuten de fallo en la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo del terminal PVc para visualizar la lista de fallos Localice el fallo especiacutefico del variador Para obtener una descripcioacuten maacutes detallada del fallo consulte el manual de usuario del variador
bull El controlador SMC-3 tiene un indicador LED parpadeante y usted debe contar el nuacutemero de parpadeos Luego en el terminal PVc navegue por la pantalla de la lista de fallos e identifique el fallo utilizando para ello el nuacutemero de parpadeos observados
El botoacuten de la esquina inferior derecha de la lista de fallos le permite regresar a la pantalla del arrancador SMC-3 o VFD
28 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB ltFEFF005500740069006c0069007a006500200065007300740061007300200063006f006e00660069006700750072006100e700f5006500730020007000610072006100200063007200690061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200063006f006d00200075006d0061002000760069007300750061006c0069007a006100e700e3006f0020006500200069006d0070007200650073007300e3006f00200061006400650071007500610064006100730020007000610072006100200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f007300200063006f006d0065007200630069006100690073002e0020004f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200070006f00640065006d0020007300650072002000610062006500720074006f007300200063006f006d0020006f0020004100630072006f006200610074002c002000520065006100640065007200200035002e00300020006500200070006f00730074006500720069006f0072002egt DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA ltFEFF00550073006100720065002000710075006500730074006500200069006d0070006f007300740061007a0069006f006e00690020007000650072002000630072006500610072006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e007400690020005000440046002000610064006100740074006900200070006500720020006c00610020007300740061006d00700061002000650020006c0061002000760069007300750061006c0069007a007a0061007a0069006f006e006500200064006900200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006900200061007a00690065006e00640061006c0069002e0020004900200064006f00630075006d0065006e00740069002000500044004600200070006f00730073006f006e006f0020006500730073006500720065002000610070006500720074006900200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200065002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065002000760065007200730069006f006e006900200073007500630063006500730073006900760065002egt NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten Capiacutetulo 2
Pruebe el controlador SMC-3
Siga este procedimiento para probar el controlador SMC-3
1 Para facilitar este procedimiento de prueba aseguacuterese de que el motor esteacute desconectado de la carga
2 Verifique que el HOA externo esteacute en modo ldquoAutordquo
3 Verifique que el 140M esteacute en la posicioacuten ON (I)
De ese modo el arrancador puede recibir la corriente trifaacutesica
4 Compruebe la ausencia del estado ldquoFaultrdquo OVLD o SC Si alguno de estos estados se encuentra activo compruebe el error en el terminal PVc La pantalla debe tener este aspecto
5 Compruebe que se visualiza el indicador 3 Ph On
6 Compruebe que se visualizan los botones ldquoStartrdquo y ldquoStoprdquo
7 Cercioacuterese de que el controlador SMC-3 tiene el ajuste de microinterruptores adecuado para su aplicacioacuten (por ejemplo tiempo de rampa liacutemite de corriente o arranque suave)
8 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStartrdquo
9 Verifique lo siguiente
bull El contactor de aislamiento se cierra
bull El motor arranca siguiendo el meacutetodo de arranque seleccionado para el controlador SMC-3
bull La indicacioacuten ldquoRunningrdquo aparece cuando el motor alcanza su maacutexima velocidad
10 Toque el botoacuten ldquoStoprdquo para parar el motor
11 Desenchufe del terminal PVc el cable en serie 1761-CBL-PM02 que va hasta el controlador MicroLogix
12 Compruebe que en el terminal PVc aparecen los siguientes mensajes de error Habraacute muacuteltiples mensajes de error como los siguientes
bull Remote Device PLC-1 Is Not Responding
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_4_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_3_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_2_status_word Controller PLC-1
bull Data Access Error for Allas Starter_1_status_word Controller PLC-1
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009 29
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Capiacutetulo 2 Validacioacuten del sistema y sugerencias de aplicacioacuten
13 Presione OK en todas las pantallas emergentes
14 Vuelva a conectar el cable en serie
15 Verifique que todas las pantallas tengan una apariencia normal
Si hay alguacuten error en las pantallas compruebe la conexioacuten entre el terminal PVc y el controlador MicroLogix
Prueba de otros variadores y arrancadores
El procedimiento Pruebe el controlador SMC-3 se puede utilizar para el variador PF 4M y para los arrancadores 190E y 103T ya que las pantallas que aparecen en el terminal PVc son similares a las del controlador SMC-3 salvo por el botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo El botoacuten ldquoFaultrdquo de la pantalla lsquoVFDrsquo siempre estaacute presente Lo hace porque el variador PF 4M solamente tiene una salida de releacute con forma C Por consiguiente la informacioacuten que puede ser sentildealizada desde el releacute se puede seleccionar ajustando el paraacutemetro t221 Este bloque modular utiliza el ajuste lsquoMotorRunningrsquo del paraacutemetro t221 [Relay Out Select] para indicar que el motor estaacute recibiendo alimentacioacuten eleacutectrica del variador
Recursos adicionales
En la paacutegina 9 encontraraacute una lista de recursos adicionales (productos e informacioacuten)
30 Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP ltFEFF0055007300650020006500730074006100730020006f007000630069006f006e006500730020007000610072006100200063007200650061007200200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f0073002000500044004600200071007500650020007000650072006d006900740061006e002000760069007300750061006c0069007a006100720020006500200069006d007000720069006d0069007200200063006f007200720065006300740061006d0065006e0074006500200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f007300200065006d00700072006500730061007200690061006c00650073002e0020004c006f007300200064006f00630075006d0065006e0074006f00730020005000440046002000730065002000700075006500640065006e00200061006200720069007200200063006f006e0020004100630072006f00620061007400200079002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200079002000760065007200730069006f006e0065007300200070006f00730074006500720069006f007200650073002egt SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE ltFEFF0041006e007600e4006e00640020006400650020006800e4007200200069006e0073007400e4006c006c006e0069006e006700610072006e00610020006e00e40072002000640075002000760069006c006c00200073006b0061007000610020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e007400200073006f006d00200070006100730073006100720020006600f600720020007000e5006c00690074006c006900670020007600690073006e0069006e00670020006f006300680020007500740073006b0072006900660074002000610076002000610066006600e4007200730064006f006b0075006d0065006e0074002e0020005000440046002d0064006f006b0075006d0065006e00740065006e0020006b0061006e002000f600700070006e006100730020006d006500640020004100630072006f0062006100740020006f00630068002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000200065006c006c00650072002000730065006e006100720065002egt ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
Publicacioacuten CC-QS006A-ES-P ndash Enero 2009Copyright copy 2009 Rockwell Automation Inc Todos los derechos reservados Impreso en EE UU
Servicio de asistencia teacutecnica de Rockwell Automation
Rockwell Automation ofrece informacioacuten teacutecnica en la web para ayudarle a utilizar sus productos En httpsupportrockwellautomationcom puede encontrar manuales teacutecnicos una base de conocimientos con respuestas a preguntas frecuentes notas teacutecnicas y de aplicacioacuten ejemplos de coacutedigo y viacutenculos a Service Packs de software asiacute como una funcioacuten llamada MySupport que puede personalizar para sacar el maacuteximo provecho de todas estas herramientas
Con el fin de mejorar nuestra asistencia telefoacutenica para instalacioacuten configuracioacuten y resolucioacuten de problemas le ofrecemos los programas de asistencia teacutecnica TechConnect Support Si desea obtener maacutes informacioacuten poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor local o con un representante de Rockwell Automation o visiacutetenos en httpsupportrockwellautomationcom
Asistencia para la instalacioacuten
Si tiene alguacuten problema con un moacutedulo de hardware durante las 24 horas posteriores a su instalacioacuten revise la informacioacuten que aparece en este manual Tambieacuten puede llamar a un nuacutemero especial de asistencia al cliente en el que recibiraacute ayuda inicial para la puesta en marcha del moacutedulo
Devolucioacuten de productos nuevos
Rockwell prueba todos sus productos para asegurarse de que funcionan correctamente antes de que salgan de faacutebrica No obstante si su producto no funciona puede ser necesario devolverlo
En Estados Unidos
14406463434Lunes a viernes de 800 a 1700 hora oficial del este de los EE UU
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con el representante local de Rockwell Automation para cualquier consulta relacionada con asistencia teacutecnica
En Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su distribuidor Para poder completar el proceso de devolucioacuten debe indicar a su distribuidor un nuacutemero de caso de asistencia (llame al nuacutemero de teleacutefono que aparece arriba para obtenerlo)
Fuera de Estados Unidos
Poacutengase en contacto con su representante local de Rockwell Automation para obtener informacioacuten sobre el procedimiento de devolucioacuten
Contraportada
ltlt ASCII85EncodePages false AllowTransparency false AutoPositionEPSFiles false AutoRotatePages None Binding Left CalGrayProfile (Gray Gamma 22) CalRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CalCMYKProfile (Euroscale Uncoated v2) sRGBProfile (sRGB IEC61966-21) CannotEmbedFontPolicy Error CompatibilityLevel 14 CompressObjects Tags CompressPages true ConvertImagesToIndexed true PassThroughJPEGImages true CreateJobTicket true DefaultRenderingIntent Default DetectBlends true DetectCurves 00000 ColorConversionStrategy LeaveColorUnchanged DoThumbnails false EmbedAllFonts true EmbedOpenType false ParseICCProfilesInComments true EmbedJobOptions true DSCReportingLevel 0 EmitDSCWarnings false EndPage -1 ImageMemory 1048576 LockDistillerParams true MaxSubsetPct 99 Optimize true OPM 1 ParseDSCComments false ParseDSCCommentsForDocInfo false PreserveCopyPage true PreserveDICMYKValues true PreserveEPSInfo false PreserveFlatness true PreserveHalftoneInfo true PreserveOPIComments false PreserveOverprintSettings true StartPage 1 SubsetFonts false TransferFunctionInfo Apply UCRandBGInfo Preserve UsePrologue false ColorSettingsFile (None) AlwaysEmbed [ true ] NeverEmbed [ true ] AntiAliasColorImages false CropColorImages true ColorImageMinResolution 150 ColorImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleColorImages true ColorImageDownsampleType Bicubic ColorImageResolution 150 ColorImageDepth 8 ColorImageMinDownsampleDepth 1 ColorImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeColorImages true ColorImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterColorImages false ColorImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG ColorACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt ColorImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000ColorACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000ColorImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasGrayImages false CropGrayImages true GrayImageMinResolution 150 GrayImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleGrayImages true GrayImageDownsampleType Bicubic GrayImageResolution 150 GrayImageDepth 8 GrayImageMinDownsampleDepth 2 GrayImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeGrayImages true GrayImageFilter FlateEncode AutoFilterGrayImages false GrayImageAutoFilterStrategy JPEG GrayACSImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt GrayImageDict ltlt QFactor 015 HSamples [1 1 1 1] VSamples [1 1 1 1] gtgt JPEG2000GrayACSImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt JPEG2000GrayImageDict ltlt TileWidth 256 TileHeight 256 Quality 30 gtgt AntiAliasMonoImages false CropMonoImages true MonoImageMinResolution 900 MonoImageMinResolutionPolicy OK DownsampleMonoImages true MonoImageDownsampleType Bicubic MonoImageResolution 900 MonoImageDepth -1 MonoImageDownsampleThreshold 100000 EncodeMonoImages true MonoImageFilter CCITTFaxEncode MonoImageDict ltlt K -1 gtgt AllowPSXObjects true CheckCompliance [ None ] PDFX1aCheck false PDFX3Check false PDFXCompliantPDFOnly false PDFXNoTrimBoxError true PDFXTrimBoxToMediaBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXSetBleedBoxToMediaBox true PDFXBleedBoxToTrimBoxOffset [ 000000 000000 000000 000000 ] PDFXOutputIntentProfile (None) PDFXOutputConditionIdentifier () PDFXOutputCondition () PDFXRegistryName (httpwwwcolororg) PDFXTrapped False CreateJDFFile false SyntheticBoldness 1000000 Description ltlt JPN ltFEFF3053306e8a2d5b9a306f300130d330b830cd30b9658766f8306e8868793a304a3088307353705237306b90693057305f00200050004400460020658766f830924f5c62103059308b3068304d306b4f7f75283057307e305930023053306e8a2d5b9a30674f5c62103057305f00200050004400460020658766f8306f0020004100630072006f0062006100740020304a30883073002000520065006100640065007200200035002e003000204ee5964d30678868793a3067304d307e30593002gt DEU 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 FRA 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 PTB 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 DAN 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 NLD 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 ESP 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 SUO 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 ITA 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 NOR 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 SVE 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 ENU (Rockwell Job Options for Web-only PDF Files) gtgtgtgt setdistillerparamsltlt HWResolution [2540 2540] PageSize [792000 1224000]gtgt setpagedevice
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
Details of the Rockwell Automation Print Specifications sheet | |||
This print specifications sheet is designed with multiple purposes- It is a vehicle to get the most accurate print specifications to RA-approved print vendors- It provides authors with an explanation of all necessary fields to complete before attaching the sheet to your PDF- It provides separate tabs so that an author can fill in all fields related to the publication on the Generic tab or publication-specific template-type tabs to minimize the number of fields an author must completeTo facilitate the most efficient use of this sheet we recommend that you click on the publication-specific tab that most closely fits you publication and use that to complete the print specificationsIMPORTANT Because this sheet was constructed using a sheet that RR Donnelley (RRD) uses to load print specifications there are some columns hidden For example the first field you must complete is Column E or Publication Number Columns A to D are used for RRD purposes and with information only representatives of that RA-approved printer can completeDO NOT delete any hidden columns from the tab you choose to use | |||
Definitions of Each Tab in Sheet | |||
Generic pub print specs | Single sheet with all required columns for necessary specifications None of the columns are completed All must be completed before attaching the sheet to your PDFThis tab has 39 blank fields you must complete via free text type or pull-down menus | ||
IN RN pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to installation instructions (IN) and release notes (RN) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to INs and RNsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
UM RM PM pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to user manuals (UM) reference manuals (RM) and programming manuals (PM) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to UMs RMs and PMsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
AP PP pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to application solutions (AP) and product profiles (PP) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to APs and PPsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
BR pub type specs | Templates with many fields already completed according to typical default settings Use this tab with publications similar to brochures (BR) However you can use this sheet for other publications that are similar to BRsThis sheet has several fields already completed with default values which you can change You must complete the additional fields | ||
Field definitions | Description of information fields used throughout the spreadsheet tabs that may not be immediately obvious to a user | ||
Attach Print Specs to PDF | |||
For Acrobat 80 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on DocumentgtAttach A File A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 70 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Click on the Attachments tab next to the publications bookmarks A new section appears at the bottom of the PDF3 Click on the Add button in the bottom section of the PDF4 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFFor Acrobat 60 follow these steps1 Open the PDF2 Go to the backcover of the PDF3 Click on the Tools pull-down menu4 Click on this sequence of menu options - Advanced Commenting Attach Attach File Tool A paper clip appears5 Click to put the paper clip somewhere on the backcover The browse window appears6 Browse to the MS Excel file with the print specs and add it to the PDFIMPORTANT If you are using Acrobat 50 or earlier please upgrade | |||
RA-QR005B-EN-E 308 |
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
Corp | 17501 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Bill To | 69 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information |
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 50 | RRD must provide this information | Text Stock = 20 White Opaque BondText Ink = Black |
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
CC-QS006A-EN-P | Simple Motor Control Connected Components Building Block Quick Start | EA | 1 | 1 | Marketing Commercial | 19041 | 01012009 | 100 | Black amp White | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | 2 | 32 | 8 | PLAIN | 20 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 85 | 11 | SIDE | 516 | 3LEFT | NA | NA | NA | NA | 25 | RRD must provide this information | Cover Stock = 90 White IndexText Stock = 20 White Opaque BondCover Ink = BlackText Ink = Black | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Send one copy as a proof to Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee Wisconsin 53204 Att Pete Grzechowiak |
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Item Description | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | NA | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | GLOSS TEXT | 80 | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | RRD must provide this information |
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |
dPrint | ContentComp | Split Shipment Indicator Flag | WCSS Item Number | Customer Item Number | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Producing Plant | Job Number | Replenishing Plant | Plant Code | Product Code | PackagingOrdering UOM | Qty per PackagingOrdering UOM | List Price Per Ea | Transfer Cost per Ea | Sell Price per Ea | Standard Cost (per Ea) | Min Order Qty (in eaches) | Multiple Order Qty (in Eaches | Chargeback Price | Item Reference 1 | Item Reference 2 | Revision Field | Max Order Qty (in eaches) | Sequentially Numbered Item | Sequentially Numbered Item - Details | Priced for Digital or Offset | Content File Location | Item Category Form (F) Book (B) | Item Subtype | Orientation | Sides Printed | CSSJLS Stock Componet | Paper Size Width | Paper Size Length | No of Forms to a Sheet | Page Qty | Sheets Qty | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | of Tabs | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency (clearview or matt) | Thermal Tape Color | Trim Size Width | Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drilling Size | Drilling Location | Glue Location | Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Poly | Box | Comments | Cross Reference Item Number 1 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Publication Number | Publication Title | PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | Qty per PackagingOrdering Unit of Measure | Min Order Qty | Multiple Order Qty | Business Group | Cost Center | Revision Date | Max Order Qty | Black amp Whiteor Color | Item CategoryForm (F) or Book (B) | BindingStitching | Orientation | Sides Printed | Printing Paper Size Width | Printing Paper Size Length | Number of Forms to a Sheet | Page Count of Publication | Number of Sheets Required to Print | CSSJLS Production Stock | Paper Stock Type | Paper Stock Weight | Paper Stock Color | Stack Offset | Tab Size | Number of Tabs Needed | Binder Size | Binder Color | Binder Ring Type | Binder Transparency | Thermal Tape Color | Finished Trim Size Width | Finished Trim Size Length | Stitching Location | Drill Hole Size | Number and Location of Drill Holes | Glue Location | Number of Pages per Pad | Fold Type | Fold At | Number of Pieces per Poly wrap | Number of Pieces per Box | Comments | Part Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Are these items being setup on dPrint (Yes or No) If yes Inv Mgmt to check Print Management flag on item setup | The contentComp will be provided by the CSC once the spec files are loaded to the DAS (the files must be named with the WCSS item ) The contentcomp must be hardcoded to the Item message Field in WCSS Must be a 10 Digit number that starts with an 8 | Required Setting this to yes will allow warehouse product to ship out before the JIT item is completed Setting this to no will hold all warehoused items until the printing of this item is complete Please indicate Y or N Note Each item with a Y will always ship separately even if produced at the same time as like items | Optional 15 Characters Max If the WCSS number provided already exists in the system then Inventory Management will assign a random WCSS number | 30 characters maximum | Cannot use quote symbol that is---- | Required Which plantPrint Center will produce this item | Required To be provided from the producing plant for JIT su | Required What is the plant code of the plant that has owning rights to the dPrint files If produced at multiple plants there can be only one owning plant | Required What is the plant code of the facility that will produce this item (see Plant and Whse Codes tab below) | Required Enter one of the applicable product | Method of packaging for publication shipmentClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Required This field auto-calculates (transfer cost divided by 5) Used to determine Standard Cost on WCSS (which is 50 of the list price for these product codes) | Required Transfer Cost per orderingpackaging unit of measure | Required Price that will be billed to customer upon order If Price Breaks enter Price Breaks and note them on separate spreadsheet | Required Replacement Cost per Packagingordering UOM | Click here for an explanation of this field otherwise type NA | Optional Used to assist customer with internal Chargebacks to end users (per packagingordering UOM) | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan record | IMPORTANT This information must match the DocMan recordDate on the publication | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Indicate Yes or No Enter Yes if the item is a sequentially numbered item | Describe the details behind the sequentially numbered item such as- Record Sequence Shipped whse will record the sequence numbers that shipped- Ship in Sequence Record required to ship products in particular sequence and the whse records the numbers | Required If PDF is to be retained in the DAS enter DAS in this field if item is part of eCreate or Custom Docs put CUSTOM in this field | Typically a BookClick here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Optional Use when finished product stored in the warehouse is to be inserted into the construction of a JIT book | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size widthThis is the width of the paper on which the publication is printed | IMPORTANT Not Trim Size lengthThis is the length of the paper on which the publication is printed | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | Optional Use when product is being printed on Shell Stock Provide warehoused WCSS Item number of product to be used in the production of JIT item | Click here for explanation of how to determine the information required | The pull-down menu lists the most common choicesClick here for a full list of the available choicesIf you use a choice not in the pull-down list type the value in the cell below the pull-down menu | If item uses tabs otherwise NA | If needed otherwise type NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If item used in a binder otherwise NA | If publication is thermal tape bound otherwise NA | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | Click here to see the available finished trim sizesThe sizes are listed - width x length | If publication is Book [B] and stapled otherwise NA | Click here for a list of possible drill locations | If publication uses padding otherwise NA | If publication is a notepad or message pad otherwise NA | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu Folding of final document optional | The location(s) of the fold | Click here for explanation of each value in the pull-down menu | Use this column to list- Cover Stock- Text Stock- Cover Ink- Text Ink- Spine if necessaryAlso use to indicate any other production or finishing requirements not provided in previous columnsClick here for an explanation of the available Cover Stock Cover Ink and Text Ink values | List only if pubication is used in manufacturing otherwise leave blank | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
PK | 1 | See DocMan for the Cost Center selections associated with each Business Group | Color | B | SADDLE | PORTRAIT | HEAD2HEAD | RRD must provide this information | RRD must provide this information | White | RRD must provide this information | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | NA | 825 | 11 | SIDE | NA | NA | NA | NA | HALF | 85 x 11 | 50 | RRD must provide this information |
PackagingOrdering Unit Of Measure | ||||
EA = Each | ||||
PK = Pack | ||||
PD = Pad | ||||
RL = Roll | ||||
BK = Book | ||||
CT = Carton | ||||
BX = Box | ||||
ST = Set | ||||
Multiple Order Qty | ||||
Separate methods of ordering same item For example if an item is packaged 50 per pad 5 pads per carton You can set the order qty as 50 each (one pad) or 250 each (1 ctn) | ||||
Business Group | ||||
The business group that the publication supports Your choice here determines the list you choose from for Cost Center | ||||
CorporateBusiness Development | ||||
Finance | ||||
Human Resources | ||||
IT | ||||
Logistics | ||||
Manufacturing | ||||
Marketing Commercial | ||||
Marketing Europe | ||||
Marketing Other | ||||
Operations | ||||
Order Services | ||||
Other | ||||
Process Improvement | ||||
Procurement | ||||
Quality | ||||
Sales | ||||
Max Order Quantity | ||||
Presale items = 100 | ||||
Postsale items = 5 | ||||
NOTE You can use other quantities but the delivery may take a bit longer because a system admin must approve it | ||||
Item Category - Form (F) or Book (B) | ||||
Form (F) = Any publication that is a single sheet (ie 1 or 2 pages) an envelope or carbonless form | ||||
Book (B) = Any publication that contains 3 or more pages | ||||
BindingStitching | ||||
For a Form (F) use | ||||
CARBONLESS | ||||
CUTSHEET | ||||
ENVELOPE | ||||
For a Book (B) use | ||||
LOOSE | LOOSE -Loose Leaf | |||
PERFECT | PERFECT - Perfect Bound | |||
PLASTCOIL | PLASTCOIL - Plastic Coil | |||
SADDLE | SADDLE - Saddle Stitch | |||
STAPLED1 | STAPLED1 -1 position | |||
STAPLED1B | STAPLED1B - bottom 1 position | |||
STAPLED2 | STAPLED2 - 2 positions | |||
THERMAL | THERMAL - Thermal bound | |||
THERMALO | THERMALO - Thermal Bound - offline | |||
Sides Printed | ||||
Head2Head = Most common Double-sided printing with headers on both pages lining up at the top of the page | ||||
Simplex = Single-sided printing | ||||
Head2Toe = Least common Double-sided printing with header on one page lining up with the footer on the other page | ||||
Number of Forms to a Sheet | ||||
Number of publication pages printed on a sheet of paper at the printerFor example if a 4-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 11 x 17 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of Forms to a Sheet = 4Example 2 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of an 85 x 11 sheet of paper that is folded in half the Number of forms to a Sheet = 4 | ||||
Number of Sheets Required to Print | ||||
Number of sheets of paper required to print the publicationFor example if a 16-page 85 x 11 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 11 x 17 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4Example 4 If a 4-page 55 x 85 publication is printed on the front and back sides of four 85 x 11 sheets of paper that are folded in half and saddle stitched together the Number of Sheets Required to Print = 4 | ||||
Paper Stock Type | ||||
Description | ||||
PLAIN | Bond | |||
ACNTCVR | Accent Cover | |||
BOND3H | Bond (3-hole) | |||
BOOKENV | Booklet Envelope | |||
C1SGLOSS | C1S Gloss Finish | |||
C1SMATTE | C1S Matt Finish | |||
C2SGLOSS | C2S Gloss Finish | |||
C2SMATTE | C2S Matt Finish | |||
CARD | Card Stock | |||
CATLGENV | Catalog Envelope | |||
CATLGENV6 | 6 Catalog Envelope | |||
COVERCOLOR | Color Cover Copy | |||
CRCKPEEL | Crack N Peel Label | |||
CUSTOM | Custom | |||
CVRFUTURA | Futura Cover | |||
ENV6x9 | Standard 6X9 Envelope | |||
ENV9X12 | Standard 9X12 Envelope | |||
ETHCERT | Ethicon Certificate | |||
GLOSSCOVER | Gloss Cover | |||
GLOSSTEXT | Gloss Text | |||
HOTSTEXT | Hots Text | |||
INDEX | Index | |||
LABEL80 | 80 Up Label | |||
MICROPRT | Micro Print | |||
OFFSET | Offset | |||
PART2 | 2 Part | |||
PART3 | 3 Part | |||
PART4 | 4 Part | |||
PART5 | 5 Part | |||
PART6 | 6 Part | |||
PERF | 12 inch Perfed | |||
PERMMAT | Perm Mat Ad | |||
PRECUTTAB | Pre-Cut Tab | |||
PREPERF | Pre-Perforated | |||
RECYL | Recycled | |||
SE10ENV | 10 Standard Envelope | |||
SE10ITENV | 10 Inside Tint Envelope | |||
SE9ENV | 9 Stanard Envelope | |||
TAG | Tag | |||
TEXT | Text | |||
TEXTCOLOR | Text Color Copy | |||
TEXTFUTURA | Futura Text | |||
TEXTLASER | Text Laser Print | |||
TRANSPRNCY | Transparencies | |||
VELLUM | Vellum | |||
VELLUM3HP | Vellum 3HP | |||
WE10ENV | 10 Window Envelope | |||
WE9ENV | 9 Windor Envelope | |||
WE9ITENV | 9 Inside Tint Window Envelope | |||
Paper Stock Color | ||||
Black | ||||
Blue | ||||
Buff | ||||
Canary | ||||
Cherry | ||||
Clear | ||||
Cream | ||||
Custom | ||||
Goldrenrod | ||||
Gray | ||||
Green | ||||
Ivory | ||||
Lavender | ||||
Manilla | ||||
NCRPinkCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteBlue | ||||
NCRWhiteBlueCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanary | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPink | ||||
NCRWhiteCanaryPinkGoldenrod | ||||
NCRWhiteGreen | ||||
NCRWhiteGoldenrodYellow | ||||
NCRWhitePink | ||||
NCRWhiteWhite | ||||
Opaque | ||||
Orange | ||||
Orchid | ||||
Peach | ||||
Pink | ||||
Purple | ||||
Salmon | ||||
Tan | ||||
Violet | ||||
White | ||||
Finished Trim Sizes (listed - width x length) | ||||
11 x 17 | ||||
18 x 24 Poster | ||||
24 x 36 Poster | ||||
3 x 5 | ||||
36 x 24 Poster | ||||
4 x 6 | ||||
475 x 7 | ||||
475 x 775 | ||||
55 x 85 | ||||
6 x 4 | ||||
7 x 9 | ||||
7385 x 9 (RSI Std) | ||||
85 x 11 | ||||
825 x 10875 | ||||
825 x 11 (RA product profile std) | ||||
8375 x 10875 | ||||
9 x 12 | ||||
A4 | ||||
A5 | ||||
Other - Custom size listed below | ||||
Drilling Locations | ||||
1CENTER | ||||
1LEFTTOP | ||||
1TOPCENTER | ||||
2LEFT | ||||
2LEFT2TOP | ||||
2TOP | ||||
2TOP2LEFT | ||||
2TOP3LEFT | ||||
2TOP5LEFT | ||||
2TOP5RIGHT | ||||
3BOTTOM | ||||
3LEFT | ||||
3LEFT2TOP | ||||
3LEFT3TOP | ||||
3RIGHT | ||||
3TOP | ||||
3TOP5LEFT | ||||
5BOTTOOM | ||||
5CENTER | ||||
5LEFT | ||||
5RIGHT | ||||
5RIGHT2TOP | ||||
5TOP | ||||
Fold Type | ||||
For TRI fold - select Z or C type | Description | |||
HALF | Half | |||
C | C Fold | |||
DBLEPARLL | Double Parallel | |||
OFFSETZ | Offset Z | |||
SAMPLE | See Sample | |||
SHORT | Short Fold | |||
V | V Fold | |||
Z | Z Fold | |||
Number of Pieces per Poly Wrap | ||||
Publication length | Number per Poly Wrap | |||
77 or more pages | NA | |||
33 to 76 pages | 25 | |||
3 to 32 pages | 50 | |||
1 or 2 pages | 100 | |||
Comments | ||||
CoverText Stock | Spine | |||
100 Gloss Cover | If your publication uses a spine make note of that in the comments field Be sure to include the spine as the last page of your PDF Also do not include that page as part of the publication page count | |||
100 Gloss Text | ||||
100 Text | ||||
10pt C1S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Cover | ||||
10pt C2S Text | ||||
10pt Text Stock | ||||
110 White Index | ||||
12pt C1S Cover | ||||
20 White Opaque Bond | ||||
50 Colored Offset | ||||
50 White Offset | ||||
50 White Opaque | ||||
60 Cover Stock | ||||
60 White Offset | ||||
80 Gloss Cover | ||||
80 Gloss Text | ||||
8pt C1S White | ||||
90 White Index | ||||
CoverText Ink | ||||
Black | ||||
Black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
Black + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color | ||||
4 color over black | ||||
4 color + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color over black + 1 PMS color | Type in PMS color | |||
4 color + 2 PMS colors | Type in PMS colors | |||
4 color + aqueous | ||||
4 color + varnish |